Sony Handycam DCR TRV50 User Manual

3-074-375-12 (1)  
Dig it a l  
Vid e o Ca m e ra  
Re co rd e r  
Operating Instructions  
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly,  
and retain it for future reference.  
Owners Record  
The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the  
serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers  
whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product.  
Model No. DCR-TRV  
Model No. AC-  
Serial No.  
Serial No.  
TM  
SERIES  
DCR-TRV50  
DCR-TRV40/TRV50  
©2002 Sony Corporation  
IMPORTANT NOTE  
Fo r cu st o m e rs in CANADA  
To comply with FCC RF exposure compliance  
requirements, the following antenna  
installation and device operating  
configurations must be satisfied: the antenna  
has been installed by the  
Me m o ry St ick”  
This Class B digital apparatus complies with  
Canadian ICES-003.  
manufacturer and no changes can be made.  
The term “IC:” before the radio certification  
number only signifies that Industry Canada  
technical specifications were met.  
Me m o ry St ick”  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC  
Rules. Operation is subject to the following  
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause  
harmful interference, and (2) this device must  
accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired  
operation.  
CAUTION  
You are cautioned that any changes or  
modifications not expressly approved in this  
manual could void your authority to operate  
this equipment.  
Note:  
This equipment has been tested and found to  
comply with the limits for a Class B digital  
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate  
radio frequency energy and, if not installed  
and used in accordance with the instructions,  
may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a  
particular installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be determined  
by turning the equipment off and on, the user  
is encouraged to try to correct the interference  
by one or more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a  
circuit different from that to which the  
receiver is connected.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/ TV technician for help.  
The supplied interface cable must be used with  
the equipment in order to comply with the  
limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart  
B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.  
3
Ma in fe a t u re s  
• Recording moving pictures on a  
tape (p. 26)  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s  
o r st ill im a g e s, a n d p la yin g  
t h e m b a ck  
• Recording still images on a tape  
(p. 52)  
• Playing back a tape (p. 40)  
• Recording still images on  
“Memory Stick”s (p. 47, 126)  
• Recording moving pictures on  
“Memory Stick”s (p. 144)  
• Viewing still images recorded on  
“Memory Stick”s (p. 156)  
• Viewing moving pictures on  
“Memory Stick”s (p. 159)  
• Viewing images recorded on  
“Memory Stick”s using the USB cable  
(p. 190, 195)  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s o n yo u r  
co m p u t e r  
• Viewing moving pictures recorded on  
tapes using the USB cable (p. 185)  
• Capturing images on your computer  
from your camcorder using the USB  
cable (p. 187)  
• Converting an analog signal into  
digital to capture images onto your  
computer (p. 196)  
4
Ma in fe a t u re s  
Acce ssin g t h e In t e rn e t via a  
Blu e t o o t h e q u ip p e d d e vice  
(DCR-TRV50 o n ly)  
Accessing the Internet, sending/  
receiving your e-mail. For details,  
refer to the Network Function  
Operating Instructions supplied  
with your camcorder. (DCR-  
TRV50 only) (p. 197)  
Ot h e r u se s  
Functions for adjusting exposure in the recording mode  
• BACK LIGHT (p. 34)  
NightShot/ Super NightShot/ Color Slow Shutter (p. 34)  
• Recording images with the flash (p. 49, 130)  
• PROGRAM AE (p. 64)  
• Adjusting the exposure manually (p. 67)  
• Flexible Spot Meter (p. 68)  
Functions for giving images more impact  
• Digital zoom (p. 31)  
The default setting is OFF. (To zoom greater than 10×, select the digital zoom power in  
D ZOOM in the menu settings.)  
• Fader (p. 57)  
• Picture effect (p. 60)  
• Digital effect (p. 61)  
• Titles (p. 110)  
• MEMORY MIX (p. 139)  
Functions for giving a natural appearance to your recordings  
• Manual focus (p. 69)  
• Sports lesson (p. 64)  
• Landscape (p. 64)  
• Spot Focus (p. 71)  
Functions for using after recording  
• END SEARCH/ EDITSEARCH/ Rec Review (p. 38)  
• DATA CODE (p. 42)  
• Tape PB ZOOM (p. 77)  
• ZERO SET MEMORY (p. 79)  
• TITLE SEARCH (p. 80)  
• Digital program editing (p. 89, 151)  
5
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s  
Using the spot light-metering  
Ma in fe a t u re s ..................................... 4  
– Flexible Spot Meter ..................... 68  
Focusing manually ................................ 69  
Using the spot focus – Spot Focus ...... 71  
Interval recording ................................. 72  
Frame by frame recording  
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e  
– Recording on a tape ............................. 8  
– Recording on a “Memory Stick” ...... 10  
– Frame recording .......................... 74  
Ge t t in g St a rt e d  
Using this manual ................................. 12  
Checking supplied accessories ............ 14  
Step 1 Preparing the power supply ... 15  
Installing the battery pack ............ 15  
Charging the battery pack ............. 16  
Connecting to a wall outlet ........... 19  
Step 2 Setting the date and time ........ 20  
Step 3 Inserting a cassette ................... 23  
Step 4 Using the touch panel .............. 24  
Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck  
Op e ra t io n s  
Playing back tapes with picture effect  
........................................................... 75  
Playing back tapes with digital effect  
........................................................... 76  
Enlarging images recorded on tapes  
– Tape PB ZOOM ........................... 77  
Quickly locating a scene  
– ZERO SET MEMORY ................. 79  
Searching the boundaries of recorded  
tape by title – TITLE SEARCH ..... 80  
Searching a recording by date  
– DATE SEARCH ........................... 81  
Searching for a photo – PHOTO  
SEARCH/ PHOTO SCAN ............. 83  
Re co rd in g – Ba sics  
Recording a picture............................... 26  
Shooting backlit subjects  
– BACK LIGHT ........................ 34  
Shooting in the dark  
NightShot/ Super NightShot/  
Color Slow Shutter .................. 34  
Self-timer recording ....................... 37  
Checking recordings  
Ed it in g  
Dubbing a tape ...................................... 86  
Dubbing only desired scenes  
– Digital program editing (on tapes)  
........................................................... 89  
Recording video or TV programs ..... 100  
Inserting a scene from a VCR  
– Insert Editing ............................. 104  
Audio dubbing .................................... 106  
Superimposing a title ......................... 110  
Making your own titles ...................... 113  
Labeling a cassette .............................. 115  
– END SEARCH/  
EDITSEARCH/ Rec Review .......... 38  
Pla yb a ck – Ba sics  
Playing back a tape ............................... 40  
To display the screen indicators  
– Display function ................... 42  
Viewing the recording on TV .............. 46  
Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g  
Op e ra t io n s  
Me m o ry St ick” Op e ra t io n s  
Recording still images on a “Memory  
Stick” during tape recording ........ 47  
Recording still images on a tape  
– Tape Photo recording ................. 52  
Adjusting the white balance manually  
........................................................... 54  
Using the wide mode ........................... 55  
Using the fader ...................................... 57  
Using special effects  
– Picture effect ................................. 60  
Using special effects  
– Digital effect ................................. 61  
Using the PROGRAM AE .................... 64  
Adjusting the exposure manually ...... 67  
Using a “Memory Stick”  
– Introduction ............................... 117  
Recording still images on  
“Memory Stick”s  
– Memory Photo recording ......... 126  
Recording images from a tape as  
still images ..................................... 135  
Superimposing a still image in the  
“Memory Stick” on an image  
– MEMORY MIX .......................... 139  
Recording moving pictures on  
“Memory Stick”s  
– MPEG movie recording ............ 144  
6
Ta b le o f co n t e n t s  
Recording pictures from tape as a  
moving picture ............................. 147  
Recording edited pictures from a  
tape as a moving picture  
Usin g t h e Ne t w o rk fu n ct io n  
(DCR-TRV50 o n ly)  
Accessing the network ....................... 197  
For the details, refer to the Network  
Function Operating Instructions  
supplied with your camcorder.  
– Digital program editing  
(on “Memory Stick”s) .................. 151  
Copying still images from a tape  
– PHOTO SAVE ............................ 154  
Viewing still images  
Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r  
Changing the default settings with  
the menu ........................................ 199  
– Memory Photo playback .......... 156  
Viewing moving pictures  
– MPEG movie playback ............. 159  
Copying images recorded on  
Tro u b le sh o o t in g  
“Memory Stick”s to tape ............. 162  
Enlarging still images recorded on  
“Memory Stick”s  
– Memory PB ZOOM ................... 164  
Playing back images in a continuous  
loop – SLIDE SHOW .................... 166  
Preventing accidental erasure  
– Image protection ........................ 167  
Deleting images – DELETE ............... 168  
Writing a print mark  
Types of trouble and how to correct  
trouble ............................................ 210  
Self-diagnosis display ......................... 217  
Warning indicators and messages .... 218  
Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n  
Usable cassettes ................................... 220  
About the “InfoLITHIUM” battery  
pack ................................................ 223  
About i.LINK ....................................... 225  
Using your camcorder abroad .......... 227  
Maintenance information and  
– PRINT MARK ............................ 171  
Using the optional printer ................. 172  
precautions .................................... 228  
Specifications ....................................... 234  
Vie w in g Im a g e s Usin g yo u r  
Co m p u t e r  
Qu ick Re fe re n ce  
Viewing images on your computer  
– Introduction ............................... 174  
Connecting your camcorder to your  
computer using the USB cable  
– For Windows users ................... 177  
Viewing images recorded on a tape  
on your computer  
Identifying parts and controls ........... 236  
Index ..................................................... 245  
– For Windows users ................... 185  
Viewing images recorded on a  
“Memory Stick” on your  
computer  
– For Windows users ................... 190  
Connecting your camcorder to your  
computer using the USB cable  
– For Macintosh users .................. 193  
Viewing images recorded on a  
“Memory Stick” on your computer  
– For Macintosh users .................. 195  
Capturing images from an analog  
video unit on your computer  
– Signal convert function ............. 196  
7
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e – Re co rd in g o n a t a p e  
This chapter introduces you to the basic features to recorded  
pictures on tapes of your camcorder. See the page in parentheses  
“( )” for more information.  
Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd (p . 19)  
Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 15).  
Open the DC  
IN jack cover.  
AC power adaptor (supplied)  
Connect the plug with its v  
mark facing up.  
In se rt in g a ca sse t t e (p . 23)  
2 Push the center of  
the cassette back to  
insert the cassette.  
Insert the cassette  
straight as far as  
possible into the  
cassette  
3 Close the cassette  
1 Slide  
OPEN/  
EJECT in the  
compartment by  
pressing  
on the  
direction of the  
arrow and open the  
lid.  
cassette  
compartment.  
After the cassette  
compartment goes  
down completely,  
close the lid until it  
clicks.  
compartment with  
the window facing  
up.  
8
Re co rd in g a p ict u re (p . 26)  
1Remove the lens cap.  
2Set the POWER  
switch to CAMERA  
while pressing the  
small green button.  
3Press OPEN to  
open the LCD  
panel.  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
The picture  
appears on the  
screen.  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
4Press START/ STOP. Your  
View finder  
camcorder starts recording. To  
stop recording, press START/  
STOP again.  
When the LCD panel is closed,  
use the viewfinder with your eye  
against the eyecup.  
Adjust the viewfinder lens to  
your eyesight (p. 30).  
When you purchase your camcorder, the clock setting is set to off. If you want to record the date  
and time for a picture, set the clock setting before recording (p. 20).  
Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck p ict u re o n t h e LCD  
scre e n (p . 40)  
2Press m to rewind the tape.  
VCR  
1Set the POWER switch  
OFF(CHG)  
to VCR while pressing  
CAMERA  
the small green button.  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
REW  
3Press N to start playback.  
PLAY  
NOTE  
Do not pick up your camcorder by  
holding the viewfinder, the flash,  
the LCD panel or the battery pack.  
9
Qu ick St a rt Gu id e – Re co rd in g o n a “ Me m o ry St ick”  
This chapter introduces you to the basic features to record on a  
“Memory Stick” of your camcorder. See the page in parentheses  
“( )” for more information.  
Co n n e ct in g t h e p o w e r co rd (p . 19)  
Use the battery pack when using your camcorder outdoors (p. 15).  
Open the DC IN  
jack cover.  
AC power adaptor (supplied)  
Connect the plug with its v  
mark facing up.  
In se rt in g a “ Me m o ry St ick” (p . 119)  
Insert a “Memory Stick” in the “Memory Stick” slot as far as it can go with the B mark  
facing up as illustrated.  
“Memory Stick” slot  
B mark  
Press the “Memory Stick”  
once lightly to eject it.  
10  
Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e o n “ Me m o ry St ick” (p . 126)  
2Set the POWER switch  
to MEMORY/  
1Remove the lens cap.  
NETWORK (DCR-  
TRV50 only) while  
pressing the small green  
button.  
Make sure that the  
LOCK switch is set to  
the left (unlock)  
position.  
3Press OPEN  
to open the  
LCD panel.  
The picture  
appears on  
the screen.  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
View finder  
When the LCD panel is closed,  
use the viewfinder with your  
eye against the eyecup.  
Adjust the viewfinder lens to  
your eyesight (p. 30).  
4Press PHOTO  
5Press PHOTO  
lightly.  
deeper.  
When you purchase your camcorder, the clock setting is set to off. If you want to record the date  
and time for a picture, set the clock setting before recording (p. 20).  
Mo n it o rin g t h e p la yb a ck st ill im a g e o n t h e LCD  
scre e n (p . 156)  
1Set the POWER  
switch to MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
(DCR-TRV50 only)  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
or VCR while  
pressing the small  
green button.  
2Press PLAY or  
PB. The last recorded  
image is displayed.  
or  
PLAY  
PB  
NOTE  
Do not pick up your camcorder by  
holding the viewfinder, the flash,  
the LCD panel or the battery pack.  
11  
— Ge t t in g St a rt e d —  
Usin g t h is m a n u a l  
The instructions in this manual are for the two models listed in the table below. Before  
you start reading this manual and operating your camcorder, check the model number  
by looking at the bottom of your camcorder. The DCR-TRV50 is the model used for  
illustration purposes. Otherwise, the model name is indicated in the illustrations. Any  
differences in operation are clearly indicated in the text, for example, “DCR-TRV50  
only”.  
As you read through this manual, buttons and settings on your camcorder are shown in  
capital letters.  
e.g. Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
When you carry out an operation, you can hear a beep to indicate that the operation is  
being carried out.  
Types of differences  
DCR-  
TRV40  
MEMORY  
TRV50  
Mark on the POWER switch  
Network function  
MEMORY/ NETWORK  
z
z
Provided  
Not provided  
No t e o n Ca sse t t e Me m o ry  
Your camcorder is based on the DV format. You can use only mini DV cassettes with  
your camcorder. We recommend that you use a tape with cassette memory  
.
Functions that require different operations depending on whether or not the tape has a  
cassette memory are:  
– End search (p. 38)  
– Date search (p. 81)  
– Photo search (p. 83)  
Functions you can operate only with the cassette memory are:  
– Title search (p. 80)  
– Superimposing a title (p. 110)  
– Labeling a cassette (p. 115)  
For details of cassette types, see page 220.  
You see this mark in the introduction of features that are operated only with  
cassette memory.  
Cassettes with cassette memory are marked by  
(Cassette Memory).  
12  
Usin g t h is m a n u a l  
No t e o n TV co lo r syst e m s  
TV color systems differ depending on the country or region. To view your recordings  
on a TV, you need an NTSC system-based TV.  
Co p yrig h t p re ca u t io n s  
Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted.  
Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the copyright laws.  
Pre ca u t io n s o n ca m co rd e r ca re  
Le n s a n d LCD scre e n /fin d e r (o n m o u n t e d m o d e ls o n ly)  
The LCD screen and the finder are manufactured using extremely high-precision  
technology, so over 99.99% of the pixels are operational for effective use.  
How ever, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (w hite, red,  
blue or green in color) that constantly appear on the LCD screen and the finder.  
These points are normal in the manufacturing process and do not affect the  
recording in any w ay.  
• Do not let your camcorder get wet. Keep your camcorder away from rain and sea  
water. Letting your camcorder get wet may cause your camcorder to malfunction.  
Sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired [a ].  
Never leave your camcorder exposed to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such as in a  
car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight [b ].  
• Be careful when placing the camera near a window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD  
screen, the finder or the lens to direct sunlight for long periods may cause  
malfunctions [c].  
• Do not directly shoot the sun. Doing so might cause your camcorder to malfunction.  
Take pictures of the sun in low light conditions such as dusk [d ].  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
13  
Ch e ckin g su p p lie d a cce sso rie s  
Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your camcorder.  
1
4
9
2
7
qs  
3
8
qd  
5
q;  
6
qa  
1 AC-L10A/L10B/L10C AC pow er  
7 Lens cap (1) (p. 26)  
adaptor (1), pow er cord (1) (p. 16)  
2 NP-FM50 battery pack (1) (p. 15, 16)  
3 A/V connecting cable (1) (p. 46)  
8 Lens hood (1) (p. 30)  
9 “Memory Stick” (1) (p. 117)  
0 USB cable (1) (p. 180)  
4 Wireless Remote Commander (1)  
qa CD-ROM (SPVD-008 USB Driver) (1)  
(p. 242)  
(p. 179)  
5 Size AA (R6) battery for Remote  
qs Cleaning cloth (1) (p. 229)  
Commander (2) (p. 243)  
qd Stylus (1) (DCR-TRV50 only) (p. 198)  
6 Shoulder strap (1)  
Contents of the recording cannot be compensated if recording or playback is not made due to a  
malfunction of the camcorder, storage media, etc.  
14  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
In st a llin g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.  
(2) Slide the battery pack down until it clicks.  
1
2
To re m o ve t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
(1) Lift up the viewfinder.  
(2) Slide the battery pack out in the direction of the arrow while pressing BATT  
down.  
1
2
BATT release  
button  
2
If you use the large capacity battery pack  
If you install the NP-FM70/ QM71/ FM90/ FM91/ QM91 battery pack on your camcorder,  
extend its viewfinder.  
15  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Use the battery pack after charging it for your camcorder.  
Your camcorder operates only with the InfoLITHIUMbattery pack (M series).  
See page 223 for details of InfoLITHIUMbattery pack.  
(1) Open the DC IN jack cover and connect the AC power adaptor supplied with  
your camcorder to the DC IN jack with the plugs v mark facing up.  
(2) Connect the power cord to the AC power adaptor.  
(3) Connect the power cord to the wall outlet.  
(4) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG). Charging begins. The remaining battery  
time is indicated in minutes on the display window.  
When the remaining battery indicator changes to  
, normal charge is completed. To  
fully charge the battery (full charge), leave the battery pack attached for about one hour  
after normal charge is completed until FULL appears in the display window. Fully  
charging the battery allows you to use the battery longer than usual.  
2
1
4
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
Aft e r ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Disconnect the AC power adaptor from the DC IN jack on your camcorder.  
16  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
Note  
Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the DC plug of  
the AC power adaptor. This may cause a short-circuit, damaging the AC power  
adaptor.  
Remaining battery time indicator  
The remaining battery time indicator in the display window indicates the approximate  
recording time with the viewfinder.  
Until your camcorder calculates the actual remaining battery time  
---- minappears in the display window.  
When you use the AC pow er adaptor  
Place the AC power adaptor near a wall outlet. If any trouble occurs with this unit,  
disconnect the plug from a wall outlet as soon as possible to cut off the power.  
Ch a rg in g t im e  
Battery pack  
NP-FM50 (supplied)  
NP-FM70  
Full charge (Normal charge)  
150 (90)  
240 (180)  
NP-QM71  
260 (200)  
NP-FM90  
330 (270)  
NP-FM91/ QM91  
360 (300)  
Approximate minutes at 25°C (77°F) to charge an empty battery pack  
The charging time may increase if the batterys temperature is extremely high or low  
because of the ambient temperature.  
Re co rd in g t im e  
Recording w ith  
the view finder  
Recording w ith  
the LCD screen  
Battery pack  
Continuous  
Typical*  
80  
Continuous  
Typical*  
60  
NP-FM50 (supplied)  
NP-FM70  
145  
305  
355  
460  
535  
105  
225  
265  
345  
400  
175  
130  
NP-QM71  
205  
150  
NP-FM90  
265  
200  
NP-FM91/ QM91  
310  
230  
Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery  
* Approximate number of minutes when recording while you repeat recording start/  
stop, zooming and turning the power on/ off. The actual battery life may be shorter.  
17  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
Pla yin g t im e  
Playing time  
w ith LCD closed  
Playing time  
on LCD screen  
Battery pack  
NP-FM50 (supplied)  
NP-FM70  
200  
415  
485  
630  
725  
135  
285  
335  
435  
505  
NP-QM71  
NP-FM90  
NP-FM91/ QM91  
Approximate minutes when you use a fully charged battery  
Note  
Approximate recording time and continuous playing time at 25°C (77°F). The battery  
life will be shorter if you use your camcorder in a cold environment.  
If the pow er goes off although remaining battery time indicator indicates that the  
battery pack has enough pow er to operate  
Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication on the battery remaining  
indicator is correct.  
Recommended charging temperature  
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between 10°C  
to 30°C (50°F to 86°F).  
What is InfoLITHIUM?  
The InfoLITHIUMis a lithium ion battery pack that can exchange data such as  
battery consumption with compatible electronic equipment. This unit is compatible  
with the InfoLITHIUMbattery pack (M series). Your camcorder operates only with  
the InfoLITHIUMbattery. InfoLITHIUMM series battery packs have the  
mark.  
TM  
SERIES  
InfoLITHIUMis a trademark of Sony Corporation.  
18  
St e p 1 Pre p a rin g t h e p o w e r su p p ly  
Co n n e ct in g t o a w a ll o u t le t  
When you use your camcorder for a long time, we recommend that you power it from a  
wall outlet using the AC power adaptor.  
(1) Open the DC IN jack cover. Connect the AC power adaptor supplied with  
your camcorder to the DC IN jack on your camcorder with the plugs v mark  
facing up.  
(2) Connect the power cord to the AC power adaptor.  
(3) Connect the power cord to a wall outlet.  
1
2,3  
PRECAUTION  
The set is not disconnected from the AC power supply (wall outlet) as long as it is  
connected to the wall outlet, even if the set itself has been turned off.  
Notes  
The AC power adaptor can supply power even if the battery pack is attached to your  
camcorder.  
The DC IN jack has source priority.This means that the battery pack cannot supply  
any power if the power cord is connected to the DC IN jack, even when the power  
cord is not plugged into a wall outlet.  
Using a car battery  
Use Sony Car Battery Adaptor (optional).  
Refer to the operating instructions of the Car Battery Adaptor for further information.  
19  
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e  
Set the date and time when you use your camcorder for the first time. CLOCK SET”  
will be displayed each time that you set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/  
NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) unless you set the date and time settings.  
If you do not use your camcorder for about four months, the date and time may be  
cleared from memory (bars may appear) because the built-in rechargeable battery  
installed in your camcorder will have been discharged (p. 231).  
Set the area, the daylight saving time, year, month, day, hour and then the minute, in  
that order.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50  
only), then press MENU to display the menu settings.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
, then press the dial.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CLOCK SET, then press the dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired area (where you are), then  
press the dial.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select whether or not the time is daylight  
saving time, then press the dial.  
Select OFF if the time is not daylight saving time. Select ON if it is.  
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired year, then press the dial.  
The year changes as follows:  
1995 T · · · · t 2002 T · · · · t 2079  
(7) Set the month, day and hour by turning the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and  
pressing the dial.  
(8) Set the minute by turning the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial and pressing the dial by  
the time signal. The clock starts to move.  
(9) Press MENU to make the menu settings disappear.  
20  
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e  
SETUP MENU  
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
USB STREAM  
LTR SIZE  
LANGUAGE  
DEMO MODE  
RETURN  
STBY  
– –:– –:– –  
2
3
4
6
8
CLOCK SET  
USB STREAM  
LTR SIZE  
LANGUAGE  
DEMO MODE  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
USB STREAM  
LTR SIZE  
LANGUAGE  
DEMO MODE  
RETURN  
STBY  
– –:– –:– –  
CLOCK SET  
AREA  
R
1
GMT +0.0  
Lisbon, London  
r
DST OFF  
DATE  
Y
M
D
– – – – – – – – – – : – –  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
EXEC NEXT ITEM  
CLOCK SET  
AREA26  
CLOCK SET  
AREA26  
5
R
GMT –5.0  
GMT –5.0  
NewYork, Bogota  
NewYork, Bogota  
r
DST OFF  
DATE  
DST OFF  
ON  
Y
M
D
DATE  
Y
M
D
– – – – – – – – – – : – –  
– – – – – – – – – – : – –  
[
] :  
EXEC NEXT ITEM  
[
] :  
EXEC NEXT ITEM  
CLOCK SET  
CLOCK SET  
AREA26  
R
R
AREA26  
GMT –5.0  
GMT –5.0  
NewYork, Bogota  
NewYork, Bogota  
r
r
DST OFF  
DST OFF  
DATE RY R M R D  
DATE RY R M R D  
R
R
R
R
R
R
:
:
2002 JAN  
1
12 00AM  
2002 JAN  
1
12 00AM  
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
r
[
] :  
EXEC NEXT ITEM  
[
] :  
EXEC NEXT ITEM  
CLOCK SET  
AREA26  
SETUP MENU  
STBY  
2002  
R
GMT –5.0  
JUL  
5:30:00 PM  
4
CLOCK SET  
USB STREAM  
LTR SIZE  
NewYork, Bogota  
r
DST OFF  
LANGUAGE  
DEMO MODE  
RETURN  
DATE RY R M R D  
R
R
R
:
2002 JUL  
4
5
30PM  
r
r
r
r
r
r
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
EXEC END  
Note  
Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models.  
If you do not set the date and time  
--:--:--and --- -- ----are recorded on the data code of the tape and the Memory  
Stick.”  
When using your camcorder abroad  
Set the clock to the local time (p. 22).  
If you use the camcorder in a region w here summer time is used  
Set DST SET to ON in the menu setting.  
Note on the time indicator  
The internal clock of your camcorder operates on a 12-hour cycle.  
12:00 AM stands for midnight.  
12:00 PM stands for noon.  
21  
St e p 2 Se t t in g t h e d a t e a n d t im e  
Sim p le se t t in g o f clo ck b y a t im e d iffe re n ce  
You can easily set the clock to the local time by setting a time difference. Select AREA  
SET, DST SET* in the menu settings. See page 208 for more information.  
* Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models.  
Wo rld t im e d iffe re n ce s  
1920 21 22 23 2425 26 272930 31 1 2 3 4 6 8 10 121314 16 17 18  
Time  
difference  
Area or country  
Time  
difference  
Area or country  
AREA  
AREA  
GMT  
Lisbon, London  
Berlin, Paris  
+11:00  
+12:00  
12:00  
11:00  
10:00  
09:00  
08:00  
07:00  
06:00  
05:00  
04:00  
03:30  
03:00  
02:00  
01:00  
Solomon Is  
1
2
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
+01:00  
+02:00  
+03:00  
+03:30  
+04:00  
+04:30  
+05:00  
+05:30  
+06:00  
+06:30  
+07:00  
+08:00  
+09:00  
+09:30  
+10:00  
Fiji, Wellington  
Eniwetok, Kwajalein  
Midway Is., Samoa  
Hawaii  
Helsinki, Cairo  
Moscow, Nairobi  
Tehran  
3
4
5
6
Abu Dhabi, Baku  
Kabul  
Alaska  
LosAngeles, Tijuana  
Denver, Arizona  
Chicago, MexicoCity  
New York, Bogota  
Santiago  
7
8
Karachi, Islamabad  
Calcutta, New Delhi  
Almaty, Dhaka  
Rangoon  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Bangkok, Jakarta  
HongKong, Singapore  
Seoul, Tokyo  
St. Johns  
Brasilia, Montevideo  
Fernando de Noronha  
Azores  
Adelaide, Darwin  
Melbourne, Sydney  
To adjust a time difference  
Select AREA SET in the menu setting, and select an area or a country you want to adjust  
to, then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
22  
St e p 3 In se rt in g a ca sse t t e  
(1) Prepare the power supply.  
(2) Slide  
OPEN/ EJECT in the direction of the arrow and open the lid.  
The cassette compartment automatically lifts up and opens.  
(3) Push the center of the cassette back to insert.  
Insert the cassette straight as far as possible into the cassette compartment with  
the window facing up.  
(4) Close the cassette compartment by pressing  
on the cassette compartment.  
The cassette compartment automatically goes down.  
(5) After the cassette compartment goes down completely, close the lid until it  
clicks.  
2
3, 4  
OPEN/ EJECT  
5
To e je ct a ca sse t t e  
Follow the procedure above, and take out the cassette in step 3.  
Notes  
Do not press the cassette compartment down forcibly. Doing so may cause a  
malfunction.  
The cassette compartment may not be closed when you press any part of the cassette  
compartment other than the  
mark.  
When you use a cassette w ith cassette memory  
Read the instruction about cassette memory to use this function properly (p. 220).  
To prevent accidental erasure  
Slide the write-protect tab on the cassette to expose the red mark.  
23  
St e p 4 Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l  
Your camcorder has operation buttons on the LCD screen.  
Touch the LCD screen directly with your finger or the supplied stylus (DCR-TRV50  
only) to operate each function. This section describes how to operate the touch panel  
during recording or playing back images on a tape.  
(1) Prepare the power supply (p. 15 to 19).  
(2) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, VCR or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-  
TRV50 only) while pressing the small green button.  
(4) Press FN. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.  
(5) Press PAGE2 to go to PAGE2. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.  
(6) Press a desired operation item. Refer to relevant pages of this manual for each  
function.  
5,6  
4
3
When the POWER switch  
is set to CAMERA  
VCR  
PAGE1 PAGE2  
EXIT  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
FN  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
END  
SCH  
SPOT DIG  
FOCUS EFFT  
MEM  
M I X METER  
SPOT  
PAGE1 PAGE2  
EXIT  
LCD  
BRT  
SELF  
TIMER  
2
1
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To e xe cu t e se t t in g s  
Press  
OK. The display returns to PAGE1/ PAGE2.  
To ca n ce l se t t in g s  
Press  
OFF to return to PAGE1/ PAGE2.  
24  
St e p 4 Usin g t h e t o u ch p a n e l  
Notes  
When using the touch panel, press operation buttons with your thumb supporting the  
LCD panel from the back side of it or press those buttons lightly with your index  
finger.  
Do not press the LCD screen with sharp-pointed objects other than the stylus  
supplied. (DCR-TRV50 only)  
Do not press the LCD screen too hard.  
Do not touch the LCD screen with wet hands.  
If FN is not on the LCD screen, touch the LCD screen lightly to make it appear. You  
can control the display with DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder.  
When operation buttons do not work even if you press them, an adjustment is  
required (CALIBRATION) (p. 230).  
When the LCD screen gets dirty, use the supplied cleaning cloth.  
When executing each item  
The green bar appears above the item.  
If the items are not available  
The color of the items changes to gray.  
Press FN to display the follow ing buttons:  
When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA  
PAGE1  
PAGE2  
END SCH, SPOT FOCUS, DIG EFFT, MEM MIX, SPOT METER  
LCD BRT, SELFTIMER  
When the POWER switch is set to VCR  
PAGE1  
PAGE2  
LCD BRT,  
PB, INDEX, END SCH  
PB, INDEX, DATA CODE  
DIG EFFT, PB ZOOM,  
See page 120 when the POWER switch is set to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50  
only).  
25  
Re co rd in g Ba sics —  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Your camcorder automatically focuses for you.  
(1) Remove the lens cap by pressing both knobs on its sides and pull the lens cap  
string to fix it.  
(2) Prepare the power supply and insert a cassette. See Step 1to Step 3for  
more information (p. 15 to 23).  
(3) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA while pressing the small green button.  
This sets your camcorder to the standby.  
(4) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel. The viewfinder automatically turns off.  
(5) Press START/ STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The REC indicator  
appears. The camera recording lamp located on the front of your camcorder  
lights up. To stop recording, press START/ STOP again.  
3
1
LOCK sw itch  
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
4
Microphone  
Camera recording  
lamp  
2
5
REC 0:00:01  
40min  
26  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Notes  
Fasten the grip strap firmly.  
The recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed  
while recording. However, they are recorded automatically on the tape. To display the  
recording data, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the Remote  
Commander for this operation (p. 42).  
Note on recording  
Your camcorder records and plays back in the SP (standard play) mode and in the LP  
(long play) mode. Select SP or LP in the menu settings (p. 206). In the LP mode, you can  
record 1.5 times as long as in the SP mode.  
When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing  
back the tape on your camcorder.  
Note on the LOCK sw itch  
When you slide the LOCK switch to the right, the POWER switch can no longer be set  
to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) accidentally. The LOCK switch is set to  
the left as the default setting.  
To enable smooth transition  
Transition between the last scene you recorded and the next scene is smooth as long as  
you do not eject the cassette even if you turn off your camcorder.  
However, check the following:  
Do not mix recordings in the SP mode and in the LP mode on one tape.  
When you change the battery pack, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
When you use a cassette with cassette memory, however, you can make the transition  
smooth even after ejecting the cassette if you use the END SEARCH (p. 38).  
If you leave your camcorder in the standby for five minutes w hile the cassette is  
inserted  
Your camcorder automatically turns off. This is to save battery power and to prevent  
battery and tape wear. To return to the standby, set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG)  
and then back to CAMERA. To start recording, press the START/ STOP button again  
without switching the POWER switch. However, your camcorder does not turn off  
automatically while the cassette is not inserted.  
When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record in the LP  
mode  
The transition between scenes may not be smooth.  
The playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be written properly  
between scenes.  
The battery use time w hen you record using the LCD screen  
The battery time is slightly shorter than the shooting time using the viewfinder.  
27  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Aft e r re co rd in g  
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
(2) Close the LCD panel.  
(3) Eject the cassette.  
(4) Remove the battery pack.  
Ad ju st in g t h e LCD scre e n  
The LCD panel can be opened up to 90 degrees.  
The LCD panel moves about 90 degrees to the viewfinder side and about 180 degrees to  
the lens side.  
180°  
90°  
When closing the LCD panel, set it vertically, and swing it into the camcorder body.  
Note  
When using the LCD screen except in the mirror mode, the viewfinder automatically  
turns off (p. 32).  
LCD screen  
When you use the LCD screen outdoors in direct sunlight, the LCD screen may be  
difficult to see. If this happens, we recommend that you use the viewfinder.  
When you adjust the angle of the LCD panel, make sure if the LCD panel is opened up  
to 90 degrees.  
28  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Ad ju st in g t h e b rig h t n e ss o f t h e LCD scre e n  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50  
only). Press FN and select PAGE2.  
When you set the POWER switch to VCR, press FN to display PAGE1 (p. 24).  
(2) Press LCD BRT. The screen to adjust the brightness of the LCD screen appears.  
(3) Adjust the brightness of the LCD screen using / +.  
: To dim  
+ : To brighten  
(4) Press  
OK to return to PAGE1/ PAGE2.  
1
2,3  
FN  
LCD  
BRT  
OK  
LCD BRT  
+
the bar indicator  
OPEN  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
LCD screen backlight  
You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select LCD B.L. in the menu settings  
when using the battery pack (p. 202).  
29  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Ad ju st in g t h e vie w fin d e r  
If you record pictures with the LCD panel closed, check the picture with the viewfinder.  
Adjust the viewfinder lens to your eyesight so that the images in the viewfinder come  
into sharp focus.  
Lift up the viewfinder and move the viewfinder lens adjustment lever.  
The view finder lens  
adjustment lever  
View finder backlight  
You can change the brightness of the backlight. Select VF B.L. in the menu settings  
when using the battery pack (p. 202).  
At t a ch in g t h e su p p lie d le n s h o o d  
To record fine pictures under strong light, we recommend attaching the lens hood. Also  
the lens cap can be attached even with the lens hood on.  
Note  
You cannot attach filters or other objects onto the lens hood.  
If you forcibly attach these objects onto the lens hood, you will no longer be able to  
remove filters or other objects from the hood.  
When you use the filter (optional)  
The shadow of the lens hood may appear in the corners of the screen.  
30  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Usin g t h e zo o m fe a t u re  
Move the power zoom lever a little for a slower zoom. Move it further for a faster zoom.  
Using the zoom sparingly results in better-looking recordings.  
W : Wide-angle (subject appears farther away)  
T : Telephoto (subject appears closer)  
W
W
T
T
T
W
To use zoom greater than 10×  
Zoom greater than 10× is performed digitally. Digital zoom can be set to 20× or 120×.  
To activate digital zoom, select the digital zoom power in D ZOOM in the menu  
settings (p. 201). The digital zoom is set to OFF as a default setting.  
W
T
The right side of the bar shows the digital zooming  
zone.  
The digital zooming zone appears when you select  
the digital zoom power in the menu settings.  
When you shoot close to a subject  
If you cannot get a sharp focus, move the power zoom lever to the Wside until the  
focus is sharp. You can shoot a subject that is at least about 80 cm (about 2 feet 5/ 8 inch)  
away from the lens surface in the telephoto position, or about 1 cm (about 1/ 2 inch)  
away in the wide-angle position.  
Note on digital zoom  
The picture quality deteriorates as you move the power zoom lever towards the T”  
side.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)  
You cannot use the digital zoom.  
31  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Sh o o t in g w it h t h e Mirro r Mo d e  
This feature allows the camera subject to view him-or herself on the LCD screen.  
The subject uses this feature to check his or her own image on the LCD screen while you  
look at the subject in the viewfinder.  
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only).  
Rotate the LCD screen 180 degrees.  
The  
indicator appears in the viewfinder and on the LCD screen.  
Xz appears in the standby, and z appears in the recording. Some of other indicators  
appear mirror-reversed and others are not displayed.  
Picture in the mirror mode  
The picture on the LCD screen is a mirror-image. However, the picture will be normal  
when recorded.  
During recording in the mirror mode  
ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander does not work.  
FN appears mirror-reversed in the viewfinder.  
When you press FN  
The  
does not appear on the screen.  
32  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
In d ica t o rs d isp la ye d in t h e re co rd in g  
Indicators are not recorded on tapes.  
Remaining battery time  
Cassette memory  
This appears when using a cassette with cassette memory.  
Recording mode  
STBY/REC  
REC 0:00:01  
45min  
50min  
Time code/Tape counter  
Remaining tape  
This appears after you insert a cassette and record or  
play back for a while.  
JUL  
4
2002  
12:05:56PM  
FN  
FN button  
Press this button to display operation buttons on the  
LCD screen.  
Time  
The time is displayed about five seconds after the  
power is turned on.  
Date  
The date is displayed about five seconds after the  
power is turned on.  
Remaining battery time indicator during recording  
The remaining battery time indicator roughly indicates the continuous recording time.  
The indicator may not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are  
recording. When you close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute  
for the correct remaining battery time in minutes to be displayed.  
Time code  
The time code indicates the recording or playback time, 0:00:00(hours : minutes :  
seconds) in CAMERA and 0:00:00:00(hours : minutes : seconds : frames) in VCR.  
You cannot rewrite only the time code.  
Remaining tape indicator  
The indicator may not be displayed accurately depending on the tape.  
Recording data  
The recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed  
while recording. However, they are recorded automatically on the tape. To display the  
recording data, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use the Remote  
Commander for this operation (p. 42).  
33  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Sh o o t in g b a cklit su b je ct s BACK LIGHT  
When you shoot a subject with the light source behind the subject or a subject with a  
light background, use the backlight function.  
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only),  
press BACK LIGHT.  
The . indicator appears on the screen. To cancel, press BACK LIGHT again.  
BACK LIGHT  
When shooting backlit subjects  
If you press EXPOSURE or SPOT METER, the backlight function will be canceled  
(p. 68).  
Sh o o t in g in t h e d a rk  
Nig h t Sh o t /Su p e r Nig h t Sh o t /Co lo r Slo w Sh u t t e r  
Usin g Nig h t Sh o t  
The NightShot enables you to shoot a subject in a dark place. For example, you can  
satisfactorily record the environment of nocturnal animals for observation when you  
use this function.  
Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only),  
slide NIGHTSHOT to ON.  
The  
and NIGHTSHOTindicators flash on the screen. To cancel the NightShot,  
slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF.  
NIGHTSHOT  
OFF  
ON  
COLOR SLOW S  
SUPER NS  
NightShot Light emitter  
34  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Usin g Su p e r Nig h t Sh o t  
The Super NightShot makes subjects more than 16 times brighter than those recorded in  
the NightShot.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, slide NIGHTSHOT to ON. The  
and  
NIGHTSHOTindicators flash on the screen.  
(2) Press SUPER NS. The  
and SUPER NIGHTSHOTindicators flash on the  
screen.  
To return the NightShot, press SUPER NS again.  
Usin g Nig h t Sh o t Lig h t  
The picture will be clearer with the NightShot Light on. To enable the NightShot Light,  
set N.S. LIGHT in  
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)  
Usin g Co lo r Slo w Sh u t t e r  
The Color Slow Shutter enables you to record color images in a dark place.  
(1) Slide NIGHTSHOT to OFF when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA.  
(2) Press COLOR SLOW S.  
The  
and COLOR SLOW SHUTTER indicators flash on the screen.  
To cancel the Color Slow Shutter, press COLOR SLOW S again.  
Notes  
Do not use the NightShot in bright places (e.g. the outdoors in the daytime). This may  
cause your camcorder to malfunction.  
When you keep NIGHTSHOT set to ON in normal recording, the picture may be  
recorded in incorrect or unnatural colors.  
If focusing is difficult when using the NightShot, focus manually.  
While using the NightShot, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
Exposure  
PROGRAM AE  
White balance  
HOLOGRAM AF  
While using the Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter  
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted depending on the brightness. At this time,  
moving pictures may slow down.  
While using the Super NightShot, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
Fader  
Digital effect  
PROGRAM AE  
Exposure  
Recording still images on a Memory Stickin the tape recording or tape recording  
standby  
White balance  
Flexible Spot Meter  
Spot Focus  
Recording with the flash  
35  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)  
You cannot use the following functions:  
Super NightShot  
Color Slow Shutter  
NightShot Light  
NightShot Light rays are infrared and so are invisible. The maximum shooting distance  
using the NightShot Light is about 3 m (10 feet).  
While using the Color Slow Shutter, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
Fader  
Digital effect  
PROGRAM AE  
Exposure  
Recording still images on a Memory Stickin the tape recording or tape recording  
standby  
Flexible Spot Meter  
Spot Focus  
Recording with the flash  
In total darkness  
The Color Slow Shutter may not work normally.  
36  
Re co rd in g a p ict u re  
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g  
Recording with the self-timer starts in 10 seconds automatically. You can also use the  
Remote Commander for this operation.  
(1) In the standby, press FN and select PAGE2 (p. 24).  
(2) Press SELFTIMER.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(3) Press START/ STOP.  
The self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two  
seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts  
automatically.  
START/STOP  
1
FN  
START/STOP  
To st o p t h e co u n t d o w n  
Press START/ STOP.  
To restart the countdown, press START/ STOP again.  
To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r  
Press SELFTIMER so that the  
(self-timer) indicator disappears from the screen while  
your camcorder is in the standby. You cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote  
Commander.  
Note  
The self-timer is automatically canceled when:  
The self-timer recording is finished.  
The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)  
You can also record still images on Memory Sticks with the self-timer (p. 134).  
37  
Ch e ckin g re co rd in g s  
END SEARCH/EDITSEARCH/Re c Re vie w  
You can use these buttons to check the recorded picture or shoot so that the transition  
between the last recorded scene and the next scene you record is smooth.  
FN  
EDITSEARCH  
END SEARCH  
You can go to the end of the recorded section after you record.  
(1) In the standby, press FN to display PAGE1 (p. 24).  
(2) Press END SCH.  
The last five seconds of the recorded section are played back and your  
camcorder returns to the standby. You can monitor the sound from the speaker  
or headphones.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To st o p se a rch in g  
Press END SCH again.  
EDITSEARCH  
You can search for the next recording start point.  
Hold down the EDITSEARCH in the standby. The recorded portion is played back.  
7 : To go backward  
+
: To go forward  
Release EDITSEARCH to stop playback. If you press START/ STOP, recording begins  
from the point you released EDITSEARCH. You cannot monitor the sound.  
38  
Ch e ckin g re co rd in g s END SEARCH/EDITSEARCH/Re c Re vie w  
Re c Re vie w  
You can check the last recorded section.  
Press the 7 side of EDITSEARCH momentarily in the standby.  
The section you have stopped most recently will be played back for a few seconds, and  
then your camcorder will return to the standby. You can monitor the sound from the  
speaker or headphones.  
End search  
When you use a cassette without cassette memory, the end search function does not  
work once you eject the cassette after you have recorded on the tape. If you use a  
cassette with cassette memory, the end search works even once you eject the cassette.  
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The end search may not work correctly.  
39  
Pla yb a ck Ba sics —  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
You can monitor the playback picture on the screen. If you close the LCD panel, you can  
monitor the playback picture in the viewfinder. You can control playback using the  
Remote Commander supplied with your camcorder.  
(1) Prepare the power supply and insert the recorded tape.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing the small green button.  
(3) Open the LCD panel while pressing OPEN.  
(4) Press m to rewind the tape.  
(5) Press N to start playback.  
(6) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME.  
: To turn down  
+ : To turn up  
When you close the LCD panel, sound is muted.  
6
2
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
VOLUME  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
3
1
4
5
REW  
PLAY  
To st o p p la yb a ck  
Press x.  
40  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
When monitoring on the LCD screen  
You can turn the LCD panel over and move it back to the camcorder body with the  
LCD screen facing out.  
If you leave the pow er on for a long time  
Your camcorder gets warm. This is not a malfunction.  
When you open or close the LCD panel  
Make sure that the LCD panel is set vertically.  
41  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
To d isp la y t h e scre e n in d ica t o rs Disp la y fu n ct io n  
Press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder or DISPLAY on the Remote  
Commander supplied with your camcorder. The indicators disappear on the screen. To  
make the indicators appear, press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL or DISPLAY again.  
DISPLAY  
DATA CODE  
DISPLAY/  
TOUCH PANEL  
Ab o u t d a t e /t im e a n d va rio u s se t t in g s  
Your camcorder automatically records not only images on the tape but also the  
recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) (data code).  
Follow the steps below to display the data code using the touch panel or the Remote  
Commander.  
Using the touch panel  
1 Set the POWER sw itch to VCR, then play back a tape.  
2 Press FN and select PAGE2.  
3 Press DATA CODE.  
DATACODE  
OFF  
OK  
CAM  
DATE  
DATA DATA  
4 Select CAM DATA or DATE DATA, then press  
OK.  
5 Press EXIT.  
Using the Remote Commander  
Press DATA CODE on the Remote Commander in the playback.  
The display changes as follows when you press the DATA CODE on the Remote  
Commander:  
date/ time t various settings (SteadyShot, exposure, white balance, gain, shutter  
speed, aperture value) t no indicator  
42  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
Date/time  
Various settings  
0:00:23:01  
40min  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
0:00:23:01  
50min  
AUTO  
60 AWB  
JUL  
4
2002  
[e ]  
[f]  
12:05:56 AM  
F1.8  
9dB  
[g ]  
[a ] Tape counter  
[b ] SteadyShot OFF  
[c] Exposure mode  
[d ] White balance  
[e ] Gain  
[f] Shutter speed  
[g ] Aperture value  
To not display various settings  
Set DATA CODE to DATE in the menu settings (p. 208).  
The display changes as follows when you press DATA CODE on the Remote  
Commander:  
date/ time y no indicator  
Various settings  
Various settings are your camcorders information when you have recorded. In the  
recording, the various settings will not be displayed.  
When you use the data code, bars (-- -- --) appear if:  
A blank portion of the tape is being played back.  
The tape is unreadable due to tape damage or noise.  
The tape was recorded by a camcorder without the date and time set.  
Data code  
When you connect your camcorder to the TV, the data code appears on the TV screen.  
Remaining battery time indicator during playback  
The indicator indicates the approximate continuous playback time. The indicator may  
not be correct, depending on the conditions in which you are playing back. When you  
close the LCD panel and open it again, it takes about one minute for the correct  
remaining battery time to be displayed.  
43  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
Va rio u s p la yb a ck m o d e s  
To operate video control buttons, set the POWER switch to VCR.  
To p la y b a ck p a u se (vie w in g a st ill p ict u re )  
Press X during playback. To resume normal playback, press N or X.  
To a d va n ce t h e t a p e  
Press M in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N.  
To re w in d t h e t a p e  
Press m in the stop mode. To resume normal playback, press N.  
To ch a n g e t h e p la yb a ck d ire ct io n  
Press  
on the Remote Commander during playback to reverse the playback direction.  
To resume normal playback, press N.  
To lo ca t e a sce n e m o n it o rin g t h e p ict u re (p ict u re se a rch )  
Keep pressing m or M during playback. To resume normal playback, release the  
button.  
To m o n it o r h ig h -sp e e d p ict u re s w h ile a d va n cin g o r re w in d in g  
t h e t a p e (skip sca n )  
Keep pressing m while rewinding or M while advancing the tape. To resume  
rewinding or advancing, release the button.  
To vie w t h e p ict u re a t slo w sp e e d (slo w p la yb a ck)  
Press y on the Remote Commander during playback. For slow playback in the reverse  
direction, press  
, then press y on the Remote Commander. To resume normal  
playback, press N.  
To vie w p ict u re s a t d o u b le sp e e d  
Press ×2 on the Remote Commander during playback. For double speed playback in the  
reverse direction, press  
normal playback, press N.  
, then press ×2 on the Remote Commander. To resume  
To vie w p ict u re s fra m e -b y-fra m e  
Press C on the Remote Commander in the playback pause. For frame-by-frame  
playback in the reverse direction, press c. To resume normal playback, press N.  
To se a rch t h e la st sce n e re co rd e d (END SEARCH)  
Press FN, then press END SCH in the stop mode. The last five seconds recorded portion  
is played back and then stopped.  
44  
Pla yin g b a ck a t a p e  
In the various playback modes  
Sound is muted.  
The previous picture may remain as a mosaic image during playback.  
When the playback pause lasts for five minutes  
Your camcorder automatically enters the stop mode. To resume playback, press N.  
Slow playback  
The slow playback can be performed smoothly on your camcorder. However, this  
function does not work for an output signal through the DV IN/ OUT jack.  
When you play back a tape in reverse  
Horizontal noise may appear at the center, or the top and bottom of the screen. This is  
not a malfunction.  
45  
Vie w in g t h e re co rd in g o n TV  
Connect your camcorder to your TV with the A/ V connecting cable supplied with your  
camcorder to watch playback picture on the TV screen. You can operate the video  
control buttons in the same way as when you monitor playback pictures on the screen.  
When monitoring playback pictures on the TV screen, we recommend that you power  
your camcorder from a wall outlet using the AC power adaptor (p. 19). Refer to the  
operating instructions of your TV.  
Open the jack cover. Connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable  
supplied with your camcorder. Then, set the TV/ VCR selector on the TV to VCR.  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
White  
IN  
Yellow  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
TV  
AUDIO  
: Signal flow  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
Red  
If yo u r TV is a lre a d y co n n e ct e d t o a VCR  
Connect your camcorder to the LINE IN input on the VCR by using the A/ V connecting  
cable supplied with your camcorder. Set the input selector on the VCR to LINE.  
If yo u r TV o r VCR is a m o n a u ra l t yp e  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video input jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. If you connect the  
white plug, the sound is L (left) signal. If you connect the red plug, the sound is R  
(right) signal.  
If your TV has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional). With  
this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable. Connect the S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks on both your  
camcorder and the TV.  
This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.  
To display the screen indicators on TV  
Set DISPLAY to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu settings (p. 209).  
Then, press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder. To turn the screen  
indicators off, press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder again.  
46  
Ad va n ce d Re co rd in g Op e ra t io n s —  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry  
St ickd u rin g t a p e re co rd in g  
You can record still images on a Memory Stickin the tape recording or tape recording  
standby. You can also record still images on a tape (p. 52).  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder (p. 119).  
Set PHOTO REC in  
to MEMORY in the menu settings (The default setting is  
MEMORY).  
(1) In the standby, keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a still image appears. The  
CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet. To change the still  
image, release PHOTO, select a still image again, and then press and hold  
PHOTO lightly.  
(2) Press PHOTO deeper.  
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.  
The image when you pressed PHOTO deeper will be recorded on the  
Memory Stick.”  
[a ][b ]  
1
SFN  
1 / 6  
CAPTURE  
640  
PHOTO  
SFN  
640  
2
PHOTO  
[a ]: Number of recorded images  
[b ]: Approximate number of images that  
can be recorded on the Memory  
Stick”  
Notes  
Do not shake or strike your camcorder when you record still images.  
The image may fluctuate.  
You cannot record still images on a Memory Stickduring following operations  
(
indicator flashes on the screen.):  
Wide mode  
Fader  
Picture effect  
Digital effect  
Super NightShot  
Color Slow Shutter  
MEMORY MIX  
Memory Stick”  
For details, see page 117 for more information.  
47  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St ickd u rin g t a p e re co rd in g  
Image size of still images  
Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.  
When you want to record still images in different size, use the Memory Photo recording  
(p. 126).  
When the POWER sw itch is set to CAMERA  
You cannot select image quality.  
The image quality when you set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-  
TRV50 only) is used. (The default setting is SUPER FINE).  
During and after recording still images on a Memory Stick”  
Your camcorder continues recording on tape.  
To record still images using the Remote Commander  
Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder immediately records the  
image on the screen.  
To record still images on a Memory Stickduring tape recording  
You cannot check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. The image when  
you press PHOTO will be recorded on the Memory Stick.”  
To record images w ith higher quality  
We recommend that you use the Memory Photo recording (p. 126).  
Title  
The title cannot be recorded.  
48  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St ickd u rin g t a p e re co rd in g  
Re co rd in g im a g e s w it h t h e fla sh  
The flash pops up automatically. The default setting is auto (no indicator). To change  
the flash mode, press the (flash) repeatedly until the flash mode indicator appears on  
the screen.  
(flash)  
Each press of (flash) changes the indicator as follows:  
t
t
t No indicator  
Auto red-eye reduction: The flash fires before recording to reduce red-eye.  
Forced flash:  
No flash:  
The flash fires regardless of the surrounding brightness.  
The flash does not fire.  
The flash is automatically adjusted to the appropriate brightness. You can also change  
FLASH LVL to the desired brightness in the menu settings (p. 200). Try recording  
various images to find the most appropriate setting for FLASH LVL.  
Notes  
Attaching the lens hood (supplied) or a conversion lens (optional) may block the light  
from the flash or cause lens shadow to appear.  
You cannot use an external flash (optional) and the built-in flash at the same time.  
(auto red-eye reduction) may not produce the desired effect depending on  
individual differences, the distance to the subject, the subject not looking at the pre-  
recording flash or other conditions.  
A flash effect cannot be obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright location.  
When you record images with the flash, sound may not be recorded clearly.  
When recording with the flash, it takes longer to prepare for image capture. This is  
because your camcorder starts to charge power for firing after the flash pops up.  
Darken the surroundings by covering the lens, and press PHOTO lightly so that your  
camcorder starts to charge power after the flash pops up.  
If it is not easy to focus on the subject automatically, for example, when recording in  
the dark, use the focal distance information (p. 70) for focusing manually.  
When you record images w ith the flash  
The allowed shooting distance is shorter than when you record on a Memory Stickin  
Memory Photo recording.  
49  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St ickd u rin g t a p e re co rd in g  
If you leave your camcorder for five or more minutes after disconnecting the  
pow er supply  
Your camcorder returns to the default setting (auto).  
You cannot shoot images w ith the flash during the follow ing operations:  
Fader  
Recording  
The flash does not fire even if you select auto (no indicator) and  
reduction) during the follow ing operations:  
Exposure  
(auto red-eye  
Flexible Spot Meter  
NightShot  
Spotlight of PROGRAM AE  
Sunset & moon of PROGRAM AE  
Landscape of PROGRAM AE  
When you use an external flash (optional) w hich does not have the auto red-eye  
reduction  
You cannot select the auto red-eye reduction.  
50  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St ickd u rin g t a p e re co rd in g  
Se lf-t im e r re co rd in g  
You can record still images on Memory Sticks with the self-timer. You can also use  
the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder (p. 119).  
Set PHOTO REC in  
to MEMORY in the menu settings.(The default setting is  
MEMORY.)  
(1) In the standby, press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press SELFTIMER.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(3) Press PHOTO deeper.  
The self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two  
seconds of the countdown, the beep gets faster, then the recording starts  
automatically.  
PHOTO  
1
FN  
3
PHOTO  
To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r  
Press SELFTIMER so that the  
(self-timer) indicator disappears from the screen while  
your camcorder is in the standby. You cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote  
Commander.  
Note  
The self-timer recording is automatically canceled when:  
The self-timer recording is finished.  
The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.  
Self-timer recording  
You can operate the self-timer recording only during the recording standby.  
51  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a t a p e  
Ta p e Ph o t o re co rd in g  
You can record still images such as photographs on tapes.  
You can record about 510 images in the SP mode and about 765 images in the LP mode  
on a 60-minute tape.  
(1) In the standby, set PHOTO REC in  
to TAPE in the menu settings (p. 201).  
(2) Keep pressing PHOTO lightly until a still image appears.  
The CAPTURE indicator appears. Recording does not start yet.  
To change the still image, release PHOTO, select a still image again, and then  
press and hold PHOTO lightly.  
(3) Press PHOTO deeper.  
The still image on the screen is recorded for about seven seconds. The sound  
during those seven seconds is also recorded.  
The still image is displayed on the screen until recording is completed.  
CAPTURE  
2
PHOTO  
•••••••  
3
PHOTO  
Re co rd in g im a g e s w it h t h e fla sh  
For the details, see page 49.  
Re co rd in g im a g e s w it h se lf-t im e r  
(1) Set PHOTO REC in  
to TAPE in the menu settings (p. 201).  
(2) Follow steps 1 and 3 on page 51.  
52  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n a t a p e Ta p e Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Notes  
During tape photo recording, you cannot change the mode or setting.  
When recording a still image, do not shake your camcorder. The image may fluctuate.  
You cannot use PHOTO during the following operations (  
indicator flashes on  
the screen):  
Fader  
Digital effect  
If you record a moving subject w ith the tape photo recording  
When you play back the still image on other equipment, the image may fluctuate.  
This is not a malfunction.  
To use the tape photo recording w ith the Remote Commander  
Press PHOTO on the Remote Commander. Your camcorder records an image on the  
screen immediately.  
To use the tape photo recording during the normal camera recording  
You cannot check an image on the screen by pressing PHOTO lightly. Press PHOTO  
deeper. The still image is then recorded for about seven seconds, and your camcorder  
returns to the standby.  
To record clear still images w ith little unsteadiness  
We recommend that you record on Memory Sticks using the Memory Photo  
recording.  
When playing back images recorded w ith the flash on other equipment  
These images may flicker.  
53  
Ad ju st in g t h e w h it e b a la n ce m a n u a lly  
You can manually adjust and set the white balance. This adjustment makes white  
subjects look white and allows more natural color balance. Normally white balance is  
automatically adjusted.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50  
only). Press MENU, then select WHT BAL in  
dial (p. 200).  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired white balance, then press  
dial.  
HOLD :  
Recording a single-colored subject or background  
OUTDOOR :  
When recording a sunset/ sunrise, just after sunset, just before sunrise, neon  
signs, or fireworks  
Under a color-matching fluorescent lamp  
n INDOOR :  
Where lighting condition changes quickly  
Excessively bright places such as studios  
Under sodium lamps or mercury lamps  
1
MANUAL SET  
EFFECT  
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
N.S. LIGHT  
STBY  
P
AUTO  
HOLD  
AUTO SHTR OUTDOOR  
RETURN  
INDOOR  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic w h it e b a la n ce  
Set WHT BAL to AUTO in the menu settings.  
If the picture is being taken in a studio lit by TV lighting  
We recommend that you record in the INDOOR.  
When you record under fluorescent lighting  
Use the automatic white balance or HOLD.  
Your camcorder may not adjust the white balance correctly in the INDOOR.  
In the automatic w hite balance  
Point your camcorder at a white subject for about 10 seconds after setting the POWER  
switch to CAMERA to get a better adjustment when:  
You detach the battery for replacement.  
You take your camcorder outdoors from inside a house holding the exposure, or vice  
versa.  
In the HOLD w hite balance  
Set the white balance to AUTO and reset to HOLD after a few seconds when:  
You change the PROGRAM AE.  
You take your camcorder outdoors from inside a house, or vice versa.  
54  
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e  
You can record a 16:9 wide picture to watch on a 16:9 wide-screen TV (16:9WIDE).  
If you connect a TV compatible with the ID-1/ ID-2 system, the screen size is  
automatically selected.  
Black bands appear on the screen during recording in 16:9WIDE mode [a ]. The picture  
during playback on a normal TV [b ] or on a wide-screen TV [c] is compressed in the  
longwise direction. If you set the screen mode of the wide-screen TV to the full mode,  
you can watch pictures of normal images [d ].  
[b ]  
[a ]  
16:9WIDE  
[c]  
[d ]  
(1) In the standby, press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
16:9WIDE in , then press the dial (p. 201).  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
2
CAMERA SET  
D
ZOOM  
PHOTO REC  
16:9WIDE  
ON  
STEADYSHOT  
FRAME REC  
INT. REC  
RETURN  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l t h e w id e m o d e  
Set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.  
55  
Usin g t h e w id e m o d e  
In the w ide mode  
You cannot select the following functions:  
Recording still images on a Memory Stickin the tape recording or tape recording  
standby  
OLD MOVIE  
BOUNCE  
During recording  
You cannot select or cancel the wide mode. When you cancel the wide mode, set your  
camcorder to the standby and then set 16:9WIDE to OFF in the menu settings.  
Connection for a TV  
Pictures recorded in the 16:9WIDE mode automatically appear on the TV screen at full  
size when:  
You connect your camcorder to a TV that is compatible with the video ID (ID-1/ ID-2)  
system.  
You connect your camcorder to the S video jack on the TV.  
ID-1 system  
The ID-1 system sends aspect ratio (screen horizontal/ vertical ratio) information (16:9,  
4:3, or letter box) with video signals.  
ID-2 system  
The ID-2 system sends a copyright protection signal with ID-1 signals inserted between  
video signals when you connect your camcorder to other equipment using an A/ V  
connecting cable.  
56  
Usin g t h e fa d e r  
You can fade in or out to give your recording a more professional appearance.  
[a ]  
STBY  
REC  
FADER  
M. FADER  
(mosaic)  
BOUNCE1) 2)  
OVERLAP2)  
WIPE2)  
DOT2)  
[b ]  
STBY  
REC  
MONOTONE  
When fading in, the picture gradually changes from black-and-white to color.  
When fading out, the picture gradually changes from color to black-and-white.  
1) You can use the bounce when D ZOOM is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
2) Fade in only.  
57  
Usin g t h e fa d e r  
(1) When fading in [a ]  
In the standby, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.  
When fading out [b ]  
In the recording, press FADER until the desired fader indicator flashes.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
FADER t M. FADER t BOUNCE t MONOTONE  
(no indicator)T  
DOT  
T
WIPE  
T
OVERLAP  
The last selected fader is indicated first of all.  
(2) Press START/ STOP. The fader indicator stops flashing.  
After fade in/ out ends, your camcorder automatically returns to the normal  
mode.  
START/STOP  
1
FADER  
FADER  
To ca n ce l t h e fa d e r  
Before pressing START/ STOP, press FADER until the indicator disappears.  
Note  
You cannot use the following functions while using the fader. Also, you cannot use the  
fader while using the following functions:  
Digital effect  
Super NightShot  
Color Slow Shutter  
Tape photo recording  
Recording still images on a Memory Stickin the tape recording or tape recording  
standby  
Recording with the flash  
Interval recording  
Frame recording  
When you select OVERLAP, WIPE, or DOT  
Your camcorder automatically stores the image recorded on a tape. While the image is  
being stored, the indicators flash fast, and the playback picture disappears. At this  
stage, the picture may not be recorded clearly, depending on the tape condition.  
58  
Usin g t h e fa d e r  
When you set the POWER sw itch to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)  
You cannot use the fader.  
While using the bounce, you cannot use the follow ing functions:  
Focus  
Zoom  
Picture effect  
Exposure  
Flexible Spot Meter  
Note on the bounce  
The BOUNCE indicator does not appear in the following mode or functions:  
When D ZOOM is activated in the menu settings  
Wide mode  
Picture effect  
PROGRAM AE  
59  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s Pict u re e ffe ct  
You can digitally process images to obtain special effects like those in films or on TV.  
NEG. ART [a ] : The color and brightness of the picture are reversed.  
SEPIA :  
The picture appears in sepia.  
B&W :  
The picture appears in monochrome (black-and-white).  
SOLARIZE [b ] : The light intensity becomes clearer, to make the picture look more like  
an illustration.  
SLIM [c] :  
STRETCH [d ] : The picture expands horizontally.  
PASTEL [e ] : The contrast of the picture is emphasized, to make the picture look  
more like an animated cartoon.  
MOSAIC [f] : The picture appears mosaic-patterned.  
The picture expands vertically.  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[d ]  
[e ]  
[f]  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA. Press MENU, then select P EFFECT in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial, then press the dial (p. 200).  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired picture effect, then press  
the dial.  
1
MANUAL SET  
OFF  
NEG. ART  
SEPIA  
B&W  
SOLARIZE  
SLIM  
P
EFFECT  
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
N. S. LIGHT  
AUTO SHTR  
RETURN  
STRETCH  
PASTEL  
MOSAIC  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l t h e p ict u re e ffe ct  
Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.  
The follow ing functions do not w ork during the picture effect  
Recording still images on a Memory Stickin the tape recording or tape recording  
standby  
OLD MOVIE of digital effect  
Bounce  
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG)  
Picture effect is automatically canceled.  
60  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s Dig it a l e ffe ct  
You can add special effects to recorded pictures using the various digital functions.  
Sound is recorded normally.  
STILL  
You can record a still image so that it is superimposed on a moving picture.  
FLASH (FLASH MOTION)  
You can record still images successively at constant intervals.  
LUMI. (LUMINANCE KEY)  
You can swap a brighter area in a still image with a moving picture.  
TRAIL  
You can record the picture so that an incidental image like a trail is left.  
SLOW SHTR (SLOW SHUTTER)  
You can slow down the shutter speed. The slow shutter is good for recording dark  
pictures more brightly.  
OLD MOVIE  
You can add an old movie type atmosphere to pictures. Your camcorder automatically  
sets the wide mode to ON and picture effect to SEPIA, and sets the appropriate shutter  
speed.  
Still image  
Moving picture  
STILL  
LUMI.  
Still image  
Moving picture  
61  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s Dig it a l e ffe ct  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press DIG EFFT. The screen to select a desired digital effect appears.  
(3) Press a desired digital effect. In the STILL and LUMI. modes, the still image is  
stored in memory.  
(4) Press / + to adjust the effect.  
: To reduce the effect  
+: To increase the effect  
Items to be adjusted  
STILL  
The rate of the still image you want to superimpose on the moving  
picture  
FLASH  
LUMI.  
The interval of frame by frame playback  
The color scheme of the area in the still image which is to be  
swapped with a moving picture  
TRAIL  
The vanishing time of the incidental image  
SLOW SHTR Shutter speed. The larger the shutter speed number, the slower the  
shutter speed.  
OLD MOVIE No adjustment necessary  
(5) Press  
OK to return to PAGE1.  
1
2~4  
DIG  
DIG EFFT  
OFF  
DIG EFFT  
OFF  
FN  
OK  
OK  
EFFT  
SLOW  
SHTR MOVIE  
OLD  
LUMI.  
STILL  
FLASH LUMI.  
TRAIL  
+
The bar appears when setting following  
digital effect : STILL, FLASH, LUMI.,  
TRAIL.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l t h e d ig it a l e ffe ct  
Press  
OFF to return to PAGE1.  
62  
Usin g sp e cia l e ffe ct s Dig it a l e ffe ct  
Notes  
The following functions do not work during digital effect:  
Fader  
Super NightShot  
Color Slow Shutter  
Tape photo recording  
Recording still images on a Memory Stickin the tape recording or tape recording  
standby  
The PROGRAM AE does not work in the slow shutter.  
The following functions do not work in the old movie:  
Wide mode  
Picture effect  
PROGRAM AE  
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG)  
Digital effect is automatically canceled.  
When recording in the slow shutter  
Auto focus may not be effective. Focus manually using a tripod.  
Shutter speed  
Shutter speed number  
SLOW SHTR 1  
SLOW SHTR 2  
SLOW SHTR 3  
SLOW SHTR 4  
Shutter speed  
1/ 30  
1/ 15  
1/ 8  
1/ 4  
63  
Usin g t h e PROGRAM AE  
You can select the PROGRAM AE (Auto Exposure) to suit your specific shooting  
requirements.  
Spotlight  
This mode prevents peoples faces, for example, from appearing excessively white  
when shooting subjects lit by strong light in the theater.  
Soft portrait  
This mode brings out the subject while creating a soft background for subjects such as  
people or flowers.  
Sports lesson  
This mode minimizes camera-shake on fast-moving subjects such as in tennis or golf.  
Beach & ski  
This mode prevents peoples faces from appearing dark in strong light or reflected light,  
such as at a beach in midsummer or on a ski slope.  
Sunset & moon  
This mode allows you to maintain atmosphere when you are recording sunsets, general  
night views, fireworks displays and neon signs.  
Landscape  
This mode is for when you are recording distant subjects such as mountains, and  
prevents your camcorder from focusing on glass or metal mesh in windows when you  
are recording a subject behind glass or a screen.  
64  
Usin g t h e PROGRAM AE  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50  
only), press PROGRAM AE. The PROGRAM AE indicator appears.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired PROGRAM AE.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
y
y
y
y
y
1
2
AE  
PROGRAM  
To ca n ce l t h e PROGRAM AE  
Press PROGRAM AE.  
65  
Usin g t h e PROGRAM AE  
Notes  
Because your camcorder is set to focus only on subjects in the middle to far distance,  
you cannot take close-ups in the following modes:  
Spotlight  
Sports lesson  
Beach & ski  
Your camcorder is set to focus only on distant subjects in the following modes:  
Sunset & moon  
Landscape  
The following functions do not work in the PROGRAM AE:  
Color Slow Shutter  
Slow Shutter  
Old movie  
Bounce  
When you set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only),  
Sports lesson does not work. (The indicator flashes.)  
The PROGRAM AE does not work in the following cases. (The indicator flashes.)  
To set NIGHTSHOT to ON  
To record images on a Memory Stickusing the MEMORY MIX.  
While WHT BAL is set to AUTO in the menu settings  
The white balance is adjusted even if the PROGRAM AE is selected.  
You can adjust the follow ing functions w hile using the PROGRAM AE  
Exposure  
Flexible Spot Meter  
If you are recording under a discharge tube such as a fluorescent lamp, sodium  
lamp or mercury lamp  
Flickering or changes in color may occur in the following modes. If this happens, turn  
the PROGRAM AE off.  
Soft portrait  
Sports lesson  
66  
Ad ju st in g t h e e xp o su re m a n u a lly  
You can manually adjust and set the exposure. Normally the exposure is automatically  
adjusted. Adjust the exposure manually in the following cases:  
When the subject is backlit  
When shooting subjects and dark backgrounds  
When recording dark pictures (e.g. night scenes) faithfully  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50  
only), press EXPOSURE.  
The exposure indicator appears.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the brightness.  
2
EXPOSURE  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic e xp o su re  
Press EXPOSURE.  
When you adjust the exposure manually, the follow ing functions do not w ork:  
Color Slow Shutter  
Backlight  
Your camcorder automatically returns to the automatic exposure:  
If you change the PROGRAM AE.  
If you slide NIGHTSHOT to ON.  
67  
Usin g t h e sp o t lig h t -m e t e rin g  
Fle xib le Sp o t Me t e r  
You can take a picture with the appropriate exposure automatically for just the point  
you want to focus on and with its exposure fixed. Use the Flexible Spot Meter in the  
following cases:  
The subject is backlit.  
When there is strong contrast between the subject and background such as with a  
subject that is on stage and lighted by a spotlight.  
(1) When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-  
TRV50 only), press FN to display PAGE1.  
(2) Press SPOT METER. The SPOT METER screen appears.  
(3) Press the desired area in the frame on the LCD screen.  
The SPOT METER indicator flashes on the LCD screen. The exposure of the  
point you selected is adjusted.  
(4) Press  
OK to return to PAGE1.  
1
2~4  
FN  
SPOT METER  
PAGE1 PAGE2  
EXIT  
SPOT  
METER  
END  
SCH  
SPOT DIG  
FOCUS EFFT  
MEM  
M I X METER  
SPOT  
AUTO  
OK  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o m a t ic e xp o su re  
Press  
AUTO to return to PAGE1.  
The follow ing functions do not w ork during Flexible Spot Meter  
Color Slow Shutter  
Backlight  
Exposure  
If you slide NIGHTSHOT to ON  
Your camcorder automatically returns from the Flexible Spot Meter to automatic  
exposure.  
68  
Fo cu sin g m a n u a lly  
You can gain better results by manually adjusting the focus in the following cases.  
Normally, focus is automatically adjusted.  
The autofocus is not effective when shooting  
Subjects through glass coated with water droplets  
Horizontal stripes  
Subjects with little contrast with backgrounds such as walls and sky  
When you want to change the focus from a subject in the foreground to a subject in  
the background.  
Shooting a stationary subject when using a tripod.  
(1) Set FOCUS to MAN when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or  
MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only).  
The 9 indicator appears.  
(2) Turn the focus ring to sharpen focus.  
2
Focus ring  
FOCUS sw itch  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o fo cu s  
Set FOCUS to AUTO.  
To re co rd d ist a n t su b je ct s  
When you set FOCUS to INFINITY, the lens focuses on and  
indicator appears. When  
you release FOCUS, your camcorder returns to the manual focus. Use this mode when  
your camcorder focuses on near objects even though you are trying to shoot a distant  
object.  
69  
Fo cu sin g m a n u a lly  
To focus precisely  
It is easier to focus on subjects if you adjust the zoom to shoot at the W(wide-angle)  
after focusing at the T(telephoto) position.  
When you shoot close to the subject  
Focus at the end of the W(wide-angle) position.  
9 changes as follow s:  
when recording a distant subject  
when the subject is too close to focus on  
Focal distance information is displayed for about three seconds on the screen in  
the follow ing cases:  
When switching the focus adjustment mode from autofocus to manual  
When turning the focus ring  
Focal distance information  
This information aids focusing if it is not easy to focus on the subject, for example,  
when recording in the dark. Use this information as a rough guide to get a sharp  
focus.  
You cannot get correct information if you have attached a conversion lens (optional) to  
your camcorder.  
70  
Usin g t h e sp o t fo cu s Sp o t Fo cu s  
You can take a picture with the appropriate focus automatically for just the point you  
want to focus on and with its focus fixed.  
(1) When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-  
TRV50 only), set FOCUS to MAN.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press SPOT FOCUS. The SPOT FOCUS screen appears.  
(4) Press the desired area in the frame on the LCD screen.  
The 9 indicator flashes on the LCD screen. The focus of the point you selected  
is adjusted.  
(5) Press  
OK to return to PAGE1.  
2
3~5  
FN  
SPOT FOCUS  
PAGE1 PAGE2  
EXIT  
SPOT  
FOCUS  
END  
SCH  
SPOT  
FOCUS EFFT  
DIG  
MEM  
M I X METER  
SPOT  
OK  
FOCUS sw itch  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To re t u rn t o t h e a u t o fo cu s  
Set FOCUS to AUTO.  
The follow ing functions do not w ork during Spot Focus:  
Exposure  
Fader  
Backlight  
PROGRAM AE  
Focal distance information  
It is not displayed on the screen.  
71  
In t e rva l re co rd in g  
You can make a time-lapse recording by setting the camcorder to automatically record  
and standby sequentially. You can achieve an excellent recording for flowering, gradual  
appearances, etc., with this function.  
Example  
1 s  
1 s  
[a ]  
[b ]  
9 min 59 s  
10 min  
9 min 59 s  
10 min  
[c]  
[a ]REC TIME  
[b ]Waiting time  
[c] INTERVAL  
(1) In the standby, press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
INT. REC in , then press the dial (p. 201).  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select SET, then press the dial.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to set INTERVAL and REC TIME.  
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select INTERVAL, then press the dial.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired interval time, then  
press the dial.  
The time: 30SEC y 1MIN y 5MIN y 10MIN  
3 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select REC TIME, then press the dial.  
4 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired recording time, then  
press the dial.  
The time: 0.5SEC y 1SEC y 1.5SEC y 2SEC  
5 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
RETURN, then press the dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(5) Press MENU to erase the menu display. The INTERVAL indicator flashes.  
(6) Press START/ STOP to start interval recording. The INTERVAL indicator lights  
up.  
72  
In t e rva l re co rd in g  
6
2
3
CAMERA SET  
ZOOM  
PHOTO REC  
16:9WIDE  
STBY  
CAMERA SET  
INT. REC  
INTERVAL  
REC TIME  
RETURN  
STBY  
30SEC  
D
STEADYSHOT  
FRAME REC  
INT. REC  
ON  
OFF  
SET  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
5
CAMERA SET  
INT. REC  
INTERVAL  
REC TIME  
RETURN  
STBY  
30SEC  
STBY  
30SEC  
1MIN  
5MIN  
10MIN  
CAMERA SET  
INT. REC  
INTERVAL  
REC TIME  
RETURN  
STBY  
INTERVAL  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
CAMERA SET  
INT. REC  
INTERVAL  
REC TIME  
RETURN  
STBY  
0.5SEC  
CAMERA SET  
INT. REC  
INTERVAL  
REC TIME  
RETURN  
STBY  
CAMERA SET  
ZOOM  
PHOTO REC  
16:9WIDE  
STBY  
D
4
0.5SEC  
1SEC  
STEADYSHOT  
FRAME REC  
INT. REC  
1.5SEC  
2SEC  
ON  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l t h e in t e rva l re co rd in g  
Perform either of the following:  
Set INT. REC to OFF in the menu settings.  
Set the POWER switch to other than CAMERA.  
To p e rfo rm n o rm a l re co rd in g d u rin g t h e w a t in ig t im e  
You can perform normal recording only once during the waiting time. Press START/  
STOP, and the indicator flashes and normal recording starts.  
To stop normal recording, press START/ STOP again. To restart interval recording,  
perform step 6.  
On recording time  
There may be a discrepancy in the recording time of up to +/ six frames from the  
selected time.  
When pressing START/STOP during recording time  
Interval recording stops. To restart it, perform step 6.  
73  
Fra m e b y fra m e re co rd in g  
Fra m e re co rd in g  
You can make a recording with a stop-motion animated effect using frame recording.  
To create this effect, alternately move the subject a little and make a frame recording.  
We recommend that you use a tripod, and operate your camcorder using the Remote  
Commander after step 4.  
(1) In the standby, press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
FRAME REC in  
, then press the dial (p. 201).  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ON, then press the dial.  
(3) Press MENU to erase the menu display.  
The FRAME REC indicator lights up.  
(4) Press START/ STOP to start frame recording. Your camcorder makes a  
recording for about six frames, and returns to recording standby.  
(5) Move the subject, and repeat step 4.  
4
MENU  
2
CAMERA SET  
ZOOM  
PHOTO REC  
16:9WIDE  
STBY  
CAMERA SET  
ZOOM  
PHOTO REC  
16:9WIDE  
STBY  
D
D
STEADYSHOT  
FRAME REC OFF  
INT. REC  
RETURN  
STEADYSHOT  
FRAME REC ON  
INT. REC  
ON  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l t h e fra m e re co rd in g  
Perform either of the following:  
Set FRAME REC to OFF in the menu settings.  
Set the POWER switch to other than CAMERA.  
Note  
The remaining tape time is not indicated correctly if you use this function continuously.  
When using the frame recording  
The last recorded frame is longer than other frames.  
74  
Ad va n ce d Pla yb a ck Op e ra t io n s —  
Pla yin g b a ck t a p e s w it h p ict u re e ffe ct  
During playback, you can process a scene using the following picture effect:  
NEG. ART, SEPIA, B&W and SOLARIZE.  
(1) In the playback or playback pause, press MENU, then select P EFFECT in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial (p. 200).  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired picture effect, then press  
the dial.  
For details of each picture effect, see page 60.  
1
MANUAL SET  
P
EFFECT  
OFF  
NEG. ART  
SEPIA  
B&W  
SOLARIZE  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
To ca n ce l t h e p ict u re e ffe ct  
Set P EFFECT to OFF in the menu settings.  
Notes  
You cannot process externally input scenes using picture effect.  
You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder when you have processed the  
image using picture effect. However, you can record images on a Memory Stick”  
(p. 135, 147), or on a VCR using your camcorder as a player.  
Pictures processed by picture effect  
Pictures processed by picture effect is not output through the DV IN/ OUT jack.  
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back  
The picture effect is automatically canceled.  
75  
Pla yin g b a ck t a p e s w it h d ig it a l e ffe ct  
During playback, you can process a scene using the following digital effect:  
STILL, FLASH, LUMI. and TRAIL.  
(1) In the playback or playback pause, press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press DIG EFFT. The screen to select a desired digital effect appears.  
(3) Press a desired digital effect. In the STILL or LUMI., the picture where you  
select the mode is stored in memory as a still image.  
(4) Press / + to adjust the effect. Refer to page 62 for details.  
(5) Press  
OK to return to PAGE2.  
1
2,3  
FN  
DIG EFFT  
OFF  
DIG  
OK  
EFFT  
STILL FLASH LUMI. TRAIL  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l t h e d ig it a l e ffe ct  
Press  
OFF to return to PAGE2.  
Notes  
You cannot process externally input scenes using digital effect.  
You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder when you have processed the  
image using digital effect. However, you can record images on a Memory Stick”  
(p. 135, 147), or on a VCR using your camcorder as a player.  
Pictures processed by digital effect  
Pictures processed by digital effect is not output through the DV IN/ OUT jack.  
When you set the POWER sw itch to OFF (CHG) or stop playing back  
Digital effect is automatically canceled.  
76  
En la rg in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t a p e s  
Ta p e PB ZOOM  
You can enlarge playback images recorded on tapes. Besides the operation described  
here, your camcorder can enlarge still images recorded on Memory Sticks (p. 164).  
(1) In the playback or playback pause, press FN and select PAGE2.  
(2) Press PB ZOOM. The PB ZOOM screen appears.  
(3) Press the area you want to enlarge in the frame on the PB ZOOM screen.  
The area you pressed moves to the center of the screen, and the playback  
image is enlarged approximately at twice the size. If you press the other area  
again, the area moves to the center of the screen.  
(4) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.  
You can enlarge the image from approximately 1.1 times up to five times its  
size.  
W: Decreases the zoom ratio.  
T: Increases the zoom ratio.  
PB ZOOM  
× 5.0  
4
T
W
END  
1
FN  
PB ZOOM  
2
PB  
ZOOM  
END  
To ca n ce l t h e PB ZOOM  
Press  
END.  
77  
En la rg in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n t a p e s Ta p e PB ZOOM  
Notes  
You cannot process externally input scenes using the PB ZOOM.  
You cannot record images on a tape on your camcorder when you have processed the  
image using the tape PB ZOOM. However, you can record images on a VCR using  
your camcorder as a player.  
You cannot record moving pictures on a Memory Stickon your camcorder when  
you have processed the picture using the tape PB ZOOM.  
The PB ZOOM is automatically canceled w hen you activate the follow ing:  
Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
Stop playback.  
Press MENU.  
Insert a Memory Stick.”  
Pictures in the PB ZOOM  
Pictures in the PB ZOOM are not output through the DV IN/ OUT jack and the  
(USB) jack.  
In the PB ZOOM  
If you press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL button, the frame on the PB ZOOM screen  
disappears. You cannot move the part you pressed to the center of the screen.  
Edge of the enlarged image  
The edge of the enlarged image cannot be displayed at the center of the screen.  
78  
Qu ickly lo ca t in g a sce n e  
ZERO SET MEMORY  
Your camcorder goes forward or backward to automatically stop at a desired scene  
having a tape counter value of 0:00:00. Use the Remote Commander for this  
operation.  
(1) In the playback, press DISPLAY when the ZERO SET MEMORY indicator does  
not appear.  
(2) Press ZERO SET MEMORY at the point you want to locate later. The tape  
counter shows 0:00:00and then starts counting. The ZERO SET MEMORY  
indicator flashes.  
(3) Press x when you want to stop playback.  
(4) Press m to rewind the tape to the tape counters zero point. The tape stops  
automatically when the tape counter reaches approximately zero. The ZERO  
SET MEMORY indicator disappears, and the time code appears.  
(5) Press N. Playback starts from the counters zero point.  
ZERO SET MEMORY  
DISPLAY  
m
x
N
Notes  
When you press ZERO SET MEMORY before rewinding the tape, the zero set memory  
will be canceled.  
There may be a discrepancy of several seconds from the time code.  
The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator disappears when you press FN.  
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The zero set memory may not work correctly.  
79  
Se a rch in g t h e b o u n d a rie s o f re co rd e d  
t a p e b y t it le TITLE SEARCH  
If you use a cassette with cassette memory, you can search for the boundaries of  
recorded tape by title. Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Before operation  
Set CM SEARCH in  
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the TITLE  
SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:  
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH  
(no indicator)  
T
PHOTO SCAN  
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the title for playback.  
Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the scene having the title that  
you selected.  
TITLE SEARCH  
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
HELLO!  
SEARCH  
MODE  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
HAPPY NEW YEAR!  
PRESENT  
GOOD MORNING  
WEDDING  
TITLE SEARCH  
3
4
5
6
7
8
HAPPY NEW YEAR!  
PRESENT  
GOOD MORNING  
WEDDING  
NIGHT  
.
>
BASEBALL  
[b ] [a ]  
[a ] Actual point you are trying to search for  
[b ] Present point on the tape  
To st o p se a rch in g  
Press x.  
If you use a cassette w ithout cassette memory  
You cannot superimpose or search a title.  
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The title search may not work correctly.  
To superimpose a title  
See page 110.  
80  
Se a rch in g a re co rd in g b y d a t e  
DATE SEARCH  
You can automatically search for the point where the recording date changes and start  
playback from that point (date search). Use a cassette with cassette memory for  
convenience. Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Use this function to check where recording dates change or to edit the tape at each  
recording date.  
Se a rch in g fo r t h e d a t e b y u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry  
Before operation  
You can use this function only when playing back a cassette with cassette memory.  
Set CM SEARCH in  
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the DATE  
SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:  
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH  
(no indicator)  
T
PHOTO SCAN  
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback.  
Your camcorder automatically starts playback at the beginning of the selected  
date.  
DATE SEARCH  
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP/ 5/02  
SEP/ 6/02  
DEC/24/02  
JAN/ 1/03  
FEB/ 11/03  
APR/29/03  
SEARCH  
MODE  
DATE SEARCH  
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP/ 5/02  
SEP/ 6/02  
DEC/24/02  
JAN/ 1/03  
FEB/ 11/03  
APR/29/03  
.
>
[b ] [a ]  
[a ] Actual point you are trying to search for  
[b ] Present point on the tape  
To st o p se a rch in g  
Press x.  
81  
Se a rch in g a re co rd in g b y d a t e DATE SEARCH  
Note  
If one days recording is less than two minutes, your camcorder may not accurately find  
the point where the recording date changes.  
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The date search may not work correctly.  
Cassette memory  
The tape with cassette memory can hold six recording dates. If you search among seven  
or more dates, see Searching for the date without using cassette memorybelow.  
Se a rch in g fo r t h e d a t e w it h o u t u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press MENU, then select CM SEARCH in  
to OFF with the SEL/ PUSH  
EXEC dial (p. 205).  
(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the DATE  
SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:  
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t (no indicator)  
(4) Press . on the Remote Commander to search for the previous date or press  
> on the Remote Commander to search for the next date. Your camcorder  
automatically starts playback at the point where the date changes. Each time  
you press . or > your camcorder searches for the previous or next date.  
To st o p se a rch in g  
Press x.  
82  
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o  
PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN  
You can search for a still image you have recorded on a tape (PHOTO SEARCH).  
You can also search for still images one after another and display each image for  
five seconds automatically regardless of cassette memory (PHOTO SCAN). Use the  
Remote Commander for these operations.  
Use this function to check or edit still images.  
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o b y u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry  
Before operation  
You can use this function only when playing back a cassette with cassette memory.  
Set CM SEARCH in  
to ON in the menu settings. (The default setting is ON.)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the  
PHOTO SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:  
TITLE SEARCH t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH  
(no indicator)  
T
PHOTO SCAN  
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the date for playback.  
Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo having the date  
that you selected.  
PHOTO SEARCH  
2
3
:
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP/ 5/02  
SEP/ 6/02  
DEC/24/02  
JAN/ 1/03  
FEB/ 11/03  
APR/29/03  
5 30PM  
:
SEARCH  
MODE  
8 50AM  
:
10 30AM  
:
11 25PM  
:
4 11PM  
:
1 45PM  
PHOTO SEARCH  
:
1
2
3
4
5
6
SEP/ 5/02  
SEP/ 6/02  
DEC/24/02  
JAN/ 1/03  
FEB/ 11/03  
APR/29/03  
5 30PM  
:
8 50AM  
:
10 30AM  
.
>
:
11 25PM  
:
4 11PM  
:
1 45PM  
[b ] [a ]  
MENU  
[a ] Actual point you are trying to search for  
[b ] Present point on the tape  
To st o p se a rch in g  
Press x.  
83  
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN  
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o w it h o u t u sin g ca sse t t e m e m o ry  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CM SEARCH in  
to OFF, then press the dial (p. 205).  
(3) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the  
PHOTO SEARCH indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:  
DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH t PHOTO SCAN t (no indicator)  
(4) Press . or > on the Remote Commander to select the photo for playback.  
Each time you press . or > your camcorder searches for the previous or  
next photo.  
Your camcorder automatically starts playback of the photo.  
To st o p se a rch in g  
Press x.  
84  
Se a rch in g fo r a p h o t o PHOTO SEARCH/PHOTO SCAN  
Sca n n in g p h o t o  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press SEARCH MODE on the Remote Commander repeatedly until the  
PHOTO SCAN indicator appears. The indicator changes as follows:  
TITLE SEARCH* t DATE SEARCH t PHOTO SEARCH  
(no indicator)  
T
PHOTO SCAN  
* Displayed only when CM SEARCH is set to ON in the menu settings.  
(3) Press . or > on the Remote Commander.  
Each photo is played back for about five seconds automatically.  
2
SEARCH  
MODE  
PHOTO 00  
SCAN  
3
To st o p sca n n in g  
Press x.  
If a tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
The photo search/ photo scan may not work correctly.  
The available number of photos that can be searched using the cassette memory  
The available number is up to 12 photos. However, you can search 13 photos or more  
using the photo scan.  
85  
Ed it in g —  
Du b b in g a t a p e  
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
You can dub or edit on the VCR connected to your camcorder using your camcorder as  
a player.  
Connect your camcorder to the VCR using the A/ V connecting cable supplied with  
your camcorder.  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY in  
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
Press the following buttons to make the indicator disappear so that they will not be  
superimposed on the edited tape:  
On your camcorder:  
DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL, DATA CODE  
On the Remote Commander:  
DISPLAY, DATA CODE, SEARCH MODE  
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert  
the recorded tape into your camcorder.  
(2) Prepare the VCR for recording, then set the input selector to LINE.  
Connect the A/ V connecting cable to AUDIO/ VIDEO jack.  
Refer to the operating instructions of the VCR.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.  
(5) Start recording on the VCR. Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
White  
IN  
Yellow  
S VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
VCR  
AUDIO  
: Signal flow  
A/ V connecting  
cable (supplied)  
Red  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e  
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.  
86  
Du b b in g a t a p e  
You can edit on VCRs that support the follow ing systems:  
8 mm,  
Betamax,  
Hi8,  
VHS,  
ED Betamax,  
S-VHS,  
mini DV,  
VHSC,  
DV, Digital8,  
S-VHSC,  
MICRO MV  
If your VCR is a monaural type  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video input jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio input jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white  
plug is connected, the left channel audio is output, and when the red plug is connected,  
the right channel audio is output.  
If your VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
VCR.  
This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.  
87  
Du b b in g a t a p e  
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le (DV co n n e ct in g ca b le )  
Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) to DV IN/ OUT jack  
on your camcorder and to DV IN on the DV products. With a digital-to-digital  
connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality  
editing. You cannot dub the titles, display indicators or the contents of cassette memory  
or letters on the Memory Stickindex screen.  
Set the input selector on the VCR to the DV input position if the VCR is equipped with  
the input selector.  
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, and insert  
the recorded tape into your camcorder.  
(2) Prepare the VCR for recording, then set the input selector to LINE. Refer to the  
operating instructions of the VCR.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(4) Play back the recorded tape on your camcorder.  
(5) Start recording on the VCR. Refer to the operating instructions of the VCR.  
DV IN/OUT  
DV  
DV IN  
: Signal flow  
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e  
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.  
You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)  
See page 225 for more information about i.LINK.  
Pictures processed by the picture effect, the digital effect or PB ZOOM  
Pictures processed by the picture effect, the digital effect or PB ZOOM are not output  
through the DV IN/ OUT jack.  
If you record a playback pause picture w ith the DV IN/OUT jack  
The recorded picture becomes rough. Also, when you play back the picture using other  
video equipment, the picture may jitter.  
88  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s  
Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto a tape without operating  
the VCR.  
Scenes can be selected by frame. You can set up to 20 programs.  
Your camcorder can also dub on Memory Sticks. See page 151 for more information.  
Unwanted scene  
Unwanted scene  
Switch the order  
Be fo re o p e ra t in g t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g o n t a p e s  
re co rd e d o n o t h e r e q u ip m e n t  
Step 1 Connecting the VCR (p. 89).  
Step 2 Setting the VCR for operation (p. 90, 94).  
Step 3 Adjusting the synchronization of the VCR (p. 95).  
When you dub using the same VCR again, you can skip steps 2 and 3.  
Usin g t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g o n t a p e s re co rd e d o n o t h e r  
e q u ip m e n t  
Operation 1 Making a program (p. 97).  
Operation 2 Performing the program (dubbing a tape) (p. 99).  
Note  
When editing digital video on tapes, the operation signals cannot be sent with  
LANC.  
St e p 1: Co n n e ct in g t h e VCR  
You can connect both an A/ V connecting cable and an i.LINK cable (DV connecting  
cable).  
When you use the A/ V connecting cable, connect the devices as illustrated on page 86.  
When you use an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), connect the devices as illustrated  
on page 88.  
If you connect using an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)  
With a digital-to-digital connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital  
form for high-quality editing.  
89  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR t o o p e ra t e w it h t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
To edit using the VCR, send the control signal by infrared rays to the remote sensor on  
the VCR.  
When you connect using an A/ V connecting cable, follow the procedure below, steps  
(1) to (4), to send the control signal correctly.  
(1) Se t t h e IR SETUP co d e  
1 Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
2 Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to LINE.  
When you connect a video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/ VTR.  
3 Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in  
, then press the dial (p. 209).  
4 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE, then press the dial.  
5 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.  
6 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial.  
7 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR, then press the dial.  
8 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR SETUP and turn the dial to select  
IR SETUP code number of your VCR, then press the dial.  
Check the code in About IR SETUP codes.(p. 91)  
MENU  
6
3
4
5
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
0 08 55 06  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT READY  
RETURN  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
RETURN  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
IR  
i. LINK  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
] :  
TAPE  
MEMORY  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
MENU END  
8
:
:
:
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
RETURN  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
0 08 55 06  
IN  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
0 08 55 06  
1
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
] :  
TAPE  
3
:
:
:
MEMORY  
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
0
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
MENU END  
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
UNDO  
0 08 55 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
IR  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
IR  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
90  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
About IR SETUP codes  
The IR SETUP code is stored in the memory of your camcorder. Be sure to set the  
correct code to match your VCR. The default setting is code number 3.  
Brand  
IR SETUP code  
Brand  
IR SETUP code  
22, 23, 24, 28, 29  
23, 32, 80  
21, 33, 35  
77, 78  
Sony  
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6  
Mitsubishi/ MGA  
Multitech  
NEC  
Admiral (M. Wards) 89  
Aiwa  
47, 54, 80  
Akai  
49, 51  
21, 35  
36  
Olympic  
Optimus  
Orion  
Audio Dynamic  
22  
Bell&Howell  
(M. Wards)  
60  
Panasonic  
Pentax  
16, 17, 77, 78  
8, 42  
Broksonic  
Canon  
21, 70, 82  
77, 78  
Philco  
26, 70, 77, 78  
47, 77, 78, 83  
78  
Citizen  
47  
Philips  
Craig  
47, 73  
Pioneer  
Curtis Mathis  
Daewoo  
DBX  
8, 77, 80  
Quasar  
6, 16, 17, 77, 78  
26, 40, 77  
RCA/ PROSCAN  
7, 8, 16, 40, 41, 42, 77, 78, 78*, 83,  
101  
21, 33, 35  
Dimensia  
Emerson  
Fisher  
8
Realistic  
Sansui  
22, 36, 37, 77, 80, 88  
26, 48, 59, 70, 80, 81, 82  
21  
36, 37, 44, 45  
Singer  
73  
Funai  
80  
Samsung  
Sanyo  
24, 24*, 32, 32*, 41, 94, 94*  
General Electric  
Goldstar/ LG  
GO VIDEO  
Hitachi  
8, 32*, 77, 94*, 101  
26, 36, 37, 47  
47  
Scott  
22, 23, 24, 28, 32, 37, 40, 41  
71  
Sharp  
88, 89  
8, 42, 78  
Shintom  
Signature 2000  
Sylvania  
Symphonic  
Tashiro  
Tatung  
Teac  
73  
HQ  
40  
80, 89  
Instant Replay  
JC Penny  
JVC  
77, 78  
77, 78, 80, 83  
80  
8, 21, 33, 35, 36, 42, 77  
12, 13, 14, 21, 33, 35  
21, 33, 35, 47  
36, 37, 42, 44, 45, 47, 49, 80  
17, 77, 78, 83  
21, 33, 35  
47  
Kenwood  
LXI (Sears)  
Magnavox  
Marantz  
Marta  
21, 33, 35  
21, 33, 35, 80  
77, 78  
Technics  
Toshiba  
Wards  
7, 40, 49  
37, 47, 88, 89, 95  
21, 33, 35, 36  
95  
47  
Memorex  
Minolta  
37, 77  
Yamaha  
Zenith  
8, 42  
* TV/ VCR component  
Note on IR SETUP codes  
Digital program editing is not possible if the VCR does not support IR SETUP codes.  
91  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
(2) Se t t in g t h e m o d e s t o ca n ce l t h e re co rd in g p a u se o n t h e VCR  
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PAUSEMODE, then press the dial.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the mode to cancel recording pause  
on the VCR, then press the dial.  
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
0 08 55 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE PAUSE  
IR TEST  
0 08 55 06  
1
2
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE PAUSE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
REC  
PB  
RETURN  
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
[
MENU END  
Buttons to cancel recording pause on the VCR  
The buttons vary depending on your VCR. To cancel recording pause:  
Select PAUSE if the button to cancel recording pause is X.  
Select REC if the button to cancel recording pause is z.  
Select PB if the button to cancel recording pause is N.  
(3) Se t t in g yo u r ca m co rd e r a n d t h e VCR t o fa ce e a ch o t h e r  
Locate the infrared rays emitter of your camcorder and face it towards the remote  
sensor of the VCR.  
Set the devices about 30 cm (12 in.) apart, and remove any obstacles between the  
devices.  
Infrared rays emitter  
VCR  
Remote sensor  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
92  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
(4) Co n firm in g VCR o p e ra t io n  
1 Insert a recordable tape into the VCR, then set to recording pause.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IR TEST, then press the dial.  
3 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
If the VCR starts recording, the setting is correct.  
When recording is finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.  
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0:08:55:06  
2
3
CUTOUTENGAGE  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
REC PAUSE  
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
0:08:55:06  
COMPLETE  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
When the VCR does not operate correctly  
After checking the code in About IR SETUP codes, set the IR SETUP or the  
PAUSEMODE again.  
Place your camcorder at least 30 cm (12 in.) away from the VCR.  
Refer to the operating instructions of your VCR.  
93  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
St e p 2: Se t t in g t h e VCR t o o p e ra t e w it h t h e i.LINK ca b le  
(DV co n n e ct in g ca b le )  
When you connect using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional), follow the  
procedure below.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(2) Turn the power of the connected VCR on, then set the input selector to DV  
input. When you connect a digital video camera recorder, set its power switch  
to VCR/ VTR.  
(3) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in  
, then press the dial (p. 209).  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE, then press the dial.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EDIT SET, then press the dial.  
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CONTROL, then press the dial.  
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select i.LINK, then press the dial.  
MENU  
6
3
4
5
:
:
:
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT READY  
RETURN  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
RETURN  
0 08 55 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
IR  
i. LINK  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
] :  
TAPE  
MEMORY  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
[
MENU END  
MENU END  
7
:
:
:
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
RETURN  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
0 08 55 06  
IN  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
0 08 55 06  
1
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
i. LINK  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
] :  
TAPE  
:
:
:
MEMORY  
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
0
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
MENU END  
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
UNDO  
0 08 55 06  
IR  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
IR  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
94  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
When you connect using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)  
You cannot dub the titles, display indicators.  
Note  
When you connect with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), you may not be able to  
operate the dubbing function correctly, depending on the VCR.  
Set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings of your camcorder.  
St e p 3: Ad ju st in g t h e syn ch ro n iza t io n o f t h e VCR  
You can adjust the synchronization of your camcorder and the VCR. Have a pen and  
paper ready for notes. Before operation, eject a cassette from your camcorder.  
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into the VCR, then set  
to recording pause.  
When you select i.LINK in CONTROL, you do not need to set to recording  
pause.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ADJ TEST, then press the dial.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
IN and OUT are recorded on an image for five times each to calculate the  
number values for adjusting the synchronization.  
The EXECUTING indicator flashes on the screen.  
When finished, the indicator changes to COMPLETE.  
(4) Rewind the tape in the VCR, then start slow playback.  
Take a note of the first number value of each IN and the closing number value  
of each OUT.  
(5) Calculate the average of all the first number values of each IN, and the  
average of all the last number values of each OUT.  
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CUT-IN, then press the dial.  
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the average number value of IN, then  
press the dial.  
The calculated start position for recording is set.  
(8) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CUT-OUT, then press the dial.  
(9) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the average number value of OUT,  
then press the dial.  
The calculated stop position for recording is set.  
(10)Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
RETURN, then press the dial.  
95  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
0 08 55 06  
2,3  
6
8
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
0 08 55 06  
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
ENGAGE  
0
PAUSEMODE REC PAUSE  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
[
ME  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
0 08 55 06  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
EXECUTING  
CUTOUTNo. 5  
IR SETUP IN  
PAUSEMODE 60  
IR TEST  
RETURN  
ME  
[
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
0 08 55 06  
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
EDIT SET  
CONTROL  
ADJ TEST  
CUTIN”  
CUTOUT”  
IR SETUP  
PAUSEMODE  
IR TEST  
0 08 55 06  
COMPLETE  
0
RETURN  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
Notes  
When you complete step 3, the image used to adjust the synchronization is recorded  
for about 50 seconds.  
If you start recording from the very beginning of the tape, the first few seconds of the  
tape may not record properly. Be sure to allow about 10 secondslead before starting  
recording.  
When you connect with an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) you may not be able to  
operate the dubbing function correctly, depending on the VCR. Keep the i.LINK  
connection, and set CONTROL to IR in the menu settings. Video and audio are sent  
by digital signals.  
96  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
Op e ra t io n 1: Ma kin g a p ro g ra m  
(1) Insert the tape for playback into your camcorder, and insert a tape for  
recording into the VCR.  
(2) Press MENU and turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in  
then press the dial (p. 209).  
,
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE, then press the dial.  
(4) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video  
operation buttons, then pause playback.  
You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with EDITSEARCH.  
(5) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to  
select MARK, then press the dial.  
The IN point of the first program is set, and the top part of the program mark  
changes to light blue.  
(6) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video  
operation buttons, then pause playback.  
(7) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
The OUT point of the first program is set, then the bottom part of the program  
mark changes to light blue.  
(8) Repeat steps 4 to 7, then set the program.  
When the program is set, the program mark changes to light blue.  
You can set up to 20 programs in maximum.  
MENU  
2
5
3
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
0 08 55 06  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT READY  
RETURN  
OTHERS  
DATA CODE  
BEEP  
COMMANDER  
DISPLAY  
VIDEO EDIT RETURN  
RETURN  
MARK  
1
IN  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
TAPE  
:
0
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
MEMORY  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
7
8
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
N X 0 08 55 06  
OUT  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
N X 0 09 07 06  
IN  
VIDEO EDIT  
N X 0 10 01 23  
IN  
1
2
MARK  
UNDO  
4
UNDO  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
ERASE ALL  
START  
EDIT SET  
:
0
:
:
:
1
:
:
:
3
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00 00  
SCENE  
TOTAL 0 00 12 00  
SCENE  
TOTAL 0 00 47 12  
SCENE  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
97  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t  
Erase OUT first and then IN from of the last program.  
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
The last set program mark flashes, then the setting is canceled.  
To cancel erasing  
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select RETURN, then press the dial in step 2.  
Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s  
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings,  
then select TAPE, then press the dial.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then select EXECUTE,  
then press the dial.  
All the program marks flash, then the settings are canceled.  
To cancel erasing all programs  
Select RETURN with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial in step 2.  
To cancel a program you have set  
Press MENU.  
The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.  
Note  
You cannot operate recording during Digital program editing.  
On a blank portion of the tape  
You cannot set IN or OUT on a blank portion of the tape.  
If there is a blank portion betw een IN and OUT on the tape  
The total time code may not be displayed correctly.  
98  
Du b b in g o n ly d e sire d sce n e s Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n t a p e s)  
Op e ra t io n 2: Pe rfo rm in g t h e p ro g ra m (Du b b in g a t a p e )  
Make sure that your camcorder and VCR are connected, and that the VCR is set to  
recording pause. When you use an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable), this procedure  
is not necessary.  
When you use a digital video camera recorder, set its power switch to VCR/ VTR.  
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings,  
then select TAPE, then press the dial.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select START, then select EXECUTE, then  
press the dial.  
Search for the beginning of the first program, then start dubbing.  
The program mark flashes.  
The SEARCH indicator appears during search, and the EDITING indicator  
appears during edit on the screen.  
The program mark changes to light blue after dubbing ends.  
When dubbing ends, your camcorder and the VCR automatically stop.  
To st o p d u b b in g d u rin g e d it in g  
Press x using the video operation buttons.  
To e n d t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g  
Your camcorder stops when the dubbing ends. Then the display returns to VIDEO  
EDIT in the menu settings.  
Press MENU to end the Digital program editing.  
You cannot record on the VCR w hen:  
The tape has run out.  
The write-protect tab on the cassette is set to lock.  
The IR SETUP code is not correct. (when IR is selected)  
The button to cancel recording pause is not correct. (when IR is selected)  
NOT READY appears on the LCD screen w hen:  
The program to operate the Digital program editing has not been made.  
i.LINK is selected but an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) is not connected.  
The power of the connected VCR is not turned on. (when you set i.LINK)  
99  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
You can record a tape from another VCR or a TV program from a TV that has video/  
audio outputs. Use your camcorder as a recorder.  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY in  
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder. If  
you are recording a tape from the VCR, insert a recorded tape into the VCR.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder,  
then immediately press X on your camcorder.  
(4) Press N on the VCR to start playback if you record a tape from a VCR. Select  
a TV program if you are recording from a TV. The picture from a TV or VCR  
appears on the screen.  
(5) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where you want to start recording  
from.  
S VIDEO  
3
REC  
PAUSE  
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
Yellow  
OUT  
White  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
Red  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
VCR  
: Signal flow  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e  
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.  
Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
In step 3, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In step 5,  
press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.  
100  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
If your TV or VCR is a monaural type  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video output jack and the  
white or the red plug to the audio output jack on the VCR or the TV. When the white  
plug is connected, the left channel audio is recorded, and when the red plug is  
connected, the right channel audio is recorded.  
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
TV or VCR.  
This connection produces higher quality DV format pictures.  
Note on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3  
are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous  
remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2,  
we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with  
black paper.  
101  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le (DV co n n e ct in g ca b le )  
Simply connect the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) to DV IN/ OUT jack  
on your camcorder and to DV OUT on the DV products. With a digital-to-digital  
connection, video and audio signals are transmitted in digital form for high-quality  
editing.  
(1) Insert a blank tape (or a tape you want to record over) into your camcorder,  
and insert the recorded tape into the VCR.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder,  
then immediately press X on your camcorder.  
(4) Press N on the VCR to start playback. The picture to be recorded appears on  
the screen.  
(5) Press X on your camcorder at the scene where you want to start recording  
from.  
3
REC  
PAUSE  
DV IN/OUT  
DV  
DV OUT  
: Signal flow  
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)  
Wh e n yo u h a ve fin ish e d d u b b in g a t a p e  
Press x on both your camcorder and the VCR.  
Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
In step 3, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In step 5,  
press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.  
102  
Re co rd in g vid e o o r TV p ro g ra m s  
You can connect one VCR only using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable).  
During digital editing  
The color of the display may be uneven. However, this does not affect the dubbed  
picture.  
If you record playback pause picture w ith the DV IN/OUT jack  
The recorded picture becomes rough. When you play back the picture using your  
camcorder, the picture may jitter.  
Before recording  
Make sure that the DV IN indicator appears on the screen or in the viewfinder. The DV  
IN indicator may appear on both equipment.  
Note on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3  
are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous  
remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2,  
we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with  
black paper.  
103  
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR  
In se rt Ed it in g  
You can insert a new scene from a VCR onto your originally recorded tape by  
specifying the insert start and end points. Use the Remote Commander for this  
operation. Connections are the same as on page 100 or 102.  
Insert a cassette containing the desired scene to insert into the VCR.  
[a ]  
[A]  
[b ]  
[c]  
[B]  
[C]  
[A]: A tape that contains the scene to be superimposed  
[B]: A tape before editing  
[C]: A tape after editing  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(2) On the connected VCR, locate just before the insert start point [a ], then press  
X to set the VCR to the playback pause.  
(3) On your camcorder, locate the insert end point [c]. Then press X to set your  
camcorder to the playback pause.  
(4) Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander. The ZERO SET  
MEMORY indicator flashes and the end point of the insert is stored in  
memory. The tape counter shows 0:00:00.”  
(5) On your camcorder, locate the insert start point [b ] by pressing m, then press  
z REC and the button on its right simultaneously.  
(6) First press X on the VCR, and after a few seconds press X on your camcorder  
to start inserting the new scene.  
Inserting automatically stops near the zero point on the tape counter. Your  
camcorder automatically returns to the recording pause.  
104  
In se rt in g a sce n e fro m a VCR In se rt Ed it in g  
5
REC  
0:00:00  
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
4
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
To ch a n g e t h e in se rt e n d p o in t  
Press ZERO SET MEMORY again after step 5 to erase the ZERO SET MEMORY  
indicator and begin from step 3.  
Usin g t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
In step 5, press z REC and MARK simultaneously, then immediately press X. In step 6,  
press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.  
Note  
Pictures and sound recorded on the portion between the insert start and end points will  
be erased when you insert the new scene.  
If you insert scenes on the tape recorded on another camcorder (including other  
DCR-TRV40/TRV50)  
The pictures and sound may be distorted. We recommend that you insert scenes on a  
tape recorded on your camcorder.  
When the inserted picture is played back  
Pictures and sound may be distorted at the end of the inserted portion. This is not a  
malfunction.  
Pictures and sound at the start point and the end point may be distorted in the LP  
mode.  
To insert a scene w ithout setting the insert end point  
Skip steps 3 and 4. Press x when you want to stop inserting.  
If you press FN  
The ZERO SET MEMORY indicator is not displayed.  
Note on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3  
are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous  
remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR 2,  
we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR with  
black paper.  
105  
Au d io d u b b in g  
You can record audio to add to the original sound on a tape by connecting audio  
equipment or a microphone. If you connect audio equipment, you can add sound to  
your recorded tape already recorded in the 12-bit sound mode by specifying the start  
and end points. The original sound will not be erased.  
Use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Select one of the following connections to add audio.  
Co n n e ct in g t h e m icro p h o n e w it h t h e MIC ja ck  
MIC  
(PLUG IN POWER)  
Microphone (optional)  
: Signal flow  
You can check recorded picture and sound by connecting your camcorder to a TV with  
the A/ V connecting cable.  
Recorded sound is not output from the speaker. Check the sound by using a TV or  
headphones.  
Co n n e ct in g t h e m icro p h o n e t o t h e in t e llig e n t a cce sso ry sh o e  
Intelligent accessory shoe  
Microphone (optional)  
106  
Au d io d u b b in g  
Co n n e ct in g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le t o t h e AUDIO/VIDEO ja ck  
Audio equipment  
LINE OUT  
AUDIO L  
White  
AUDIO R  
Red  
L
R
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
Do not connect the  
video (yellow) plug.  
: Signal flow  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
Du b b in g w it h t h e b u ilt -in m icro p h o n e  
No connection is necessary.  
Note  
When dubbing with the AUDIO/ VIDEO jack or the built-in microphone, pictures are  
not output through the S VIDEO jack or the AUDIO/ VIDEO jack. Check the recorded  
picture on the screen. You can check the recorded sound by using headphones.  
If you make all the connections  
The audio input to be recorded will take precedence over others in the following order:  
MIC (PLUG IN POWER) jack  
Intelligent accessory shoe  
AUDIO/ VIDEO jack  
Built-in microphone  
107  
Au d io d u b b in g  
Ad d in g a u d io o n a re co rd e d t a p e  
Choose a connection described on the previous pages, and connect audio equipment or  
microphone to your camcorder. Then follow the procedure below.  
(1) Insert the recorded tape into your camcorder.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to VCR on your camcorder.  
(3) Locate the recording start point by pressing N. Then press X at the point  
where you want to start recording to set your camcorder to the playback  
pause.  
(4) Press AUDIO DUB on the Remote Commander. The green X indicator  
appears on screen.  
(5) Press X and start playing back the audio you want to record at the same time.  
The new sound is recorded in stereo 2 (ST2) during playback. While audio is  
being recorded, the red  
appears on the screen.  
(6) Press x at the point where you want to stop recording.  
AUDIO DUB  
To add audio more precisely  
Press ZERO SET MEMORY on the Remote Commander at the point where you want to  
stop recording later in the playback.  
Carry out from steps 3 to 5. Recording automatically stops at the point where ZERO  
SET MEMORY was pressed.  
108  
Au d io d u b b in g  
Mo n it o rin g t h e n e w re co rd e d so u n d  
(1) Play back the tape on which you added audio.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select AUDIO MIX in  
settings, then press the dial.  
in the menu  
VCR SET  
HiFi SOUND  
AUDIO MIX  
A/VcDV OUT ST1  
ST2  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to adjust the balance between the original  
sound (ST1) and the new sound (ST2), then press the dial.  
Five minutes after you disconnect the power supply or remove the battery  
pack, the AUDIO MIX setting returns to original sound (ST1) only. The default  
setting is original sound only.  
Notes  
New audio cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the 16-bit mode (32 kHz,  
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz).  
New audio cannot be recorded on a tape already recorded in the LP mode.  
You cannot add audio with the DV IN/ OUT jack.  
You cannot add audio on the blank portion of the tape.  
If an i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional) is connected to your camcorder  
You cannot add audio to a recorded tape.  
We recommend that you add audio on a tape recorded w ith your camcorder  
If you add audio on a tape recorded with another camcorder (including other  
DCR-TRV40/ TRV50), the sound quality may become worse.  
If you set the w rite-protect tab of the cassette to lock  
You cannot record on a tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection.  
109  
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le  
If you use a tape with cassette memory, you can superimpose the title. When  
you play back the tape, the title is displayed for five seconds from the point  
where you superimposed it.  
VACATION  
(1) In the recording , recording standby, playback or playback pause, press  
MENU, then select TITLE in  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial (p. 205).  
, then press the dial.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired title, then press the dial.  
The title flashes.  
(4) Change the color, size, or position, if necessary.  
1 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select COLOR, SIZE or POSITION, then  
press the dial. The selected item appears.  
2 Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the  
dial.  
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until the title is laid out as desired.  
(5) Press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial again to complete the setting.  
In the recording, playback or playback pause:  
The TITLE SAVE indicator appears on the screen for five seconds and the title  
is set.  
In the standby:  
The TITLE indicator appears. When you press START/ STOP to start  
recording, TITLE SAVE appears on the screen for five seconds, and the title is  
set.  
PRESET TITLE  
HELLO!  
HAPPY BIRTHDAY  
HAPPY HOLIDAYS  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
OUR SWEET BABY  
WEDDING  
PRESET TITLE  
HELLO!  
HAPPY BIRTHDAY  
HAPPY HOLIDAYS  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
OUR SWEET BABY  
WEDDING  
2
3
4
VACATION  
THE END  
VACATION  
THE END  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
PRESET TITLE  
HELLO!  
HAPPY BIRTHDAY  
HAPPY HOLIDAYS  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
OUR SWEET BABY  
WEDDING  
TITLE  
VACATION  
MENU  
VACATION  
THE END  
RETURN  
[
] :  
[
] :  
[
] :  
MENU END  
EXEC SAVE MENU END  
SIZE  
SMALL  
TITLE  
SIZE  
LARGE  
VACATION  
VACATION  
[
] :  
[
] :  
EXEC SAVE MENU END  
110  
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le  
If you set the w rite-protect tab of the cassette to lock  
You cannot superimpose or erase the title. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write  
protection.  
To use a custom title  
If you want to use a custom title, select  
in step 2.  
If the tape has a blank portion  
You cannot superimpose a title on the portion.  
If the tape has a blank portion betw een recorded portions  
Titles may not be displayed correctly.  
Titles superimposed w ith your camcorder  
Titles are displayed by only the  
DV format video equipment with an index titler.  
The point you superimposed the title may be detected as an index signal when  
searching a recording with other video equipment.  
If the tape has too many index signals  
You may not be able to superimpose a title because the cassette memory becomes full.  
In this case, delete data you do not need.  
To not display titles  
Set TITLE DSPL to OFF in the menu settings (p. 205).  
Title setting  
The title color changes as follows:  
WHITE y YELLOW y VIOLET y RED y CYAN y GREEN y BLUE  
The title size changes as follows:  
SMALL y LARGE  
You cannot input 13 characters or more in LARGE size. If you input more than 12  
characters, the title size returns to SMALL even if you select LARGE.  
If you select SMALL, you have nine choices for the title position.  
If you select LARGE, you have eight choices for the title position.  
One cassette can have up to about 20 titles, w ith each title comprising five  
characters  
However, if the cassette memory is full with date, photo and cassette label data, one  
cassette can have only up to about 11 titles each comprising five characters.  
Cassette memory capacity is as follows:  
six date data  
12 photo data  
one cassette label  
If the “  
FULLmark appears  
The cassette memory is full. Erase unwanted titles.  
111  
Su p e rim p o sin g a t it le  
Era sin g a t it le  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.  
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLEERASE in  
, then press the dial (p. 205).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the title you want to erase, then press  
the dial. ERASE OK ? indicator appears.  
(4) Make sure that the title is the one you want to erase, and turn the SEL/ PUSH  
EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes to EXECUTE.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
The ERASING flashes on the screen. When the title is erased, the COMPLETE  
is displayed.  
2
CM SET  
TITLE ERASE  
TITLE  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
CM SEARCH  
TAPE TITLE  
ERASE ALL  
RETURN  
1
2
3
4
5
6
HELLO!  
CONGRATULATIONS!  
HAPPY NEW YEAR!  
PRESENT  
GOOD MORNING  
WEDDING  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
3
4
4
MENU  
TITLE ERASE  
TITLE ERASE  
4
PRESENT  
PRESENT  
ERASE OK?  
RETURN  
OK  
ERASE OK?  
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l e ra sin g a t it le  
Select RETURN in step 4 or 5.  
112  
Ma kin g yo u r o w n t it le s  
You can make up to two titles and store them in the memory of your camcorder. Each  
title can have up to 20 characters.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.  
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TITLE in  
, then  
press the dial (p. 205).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
, then press the dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET,  
then press the dial.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character,  
then press the dial.  
(6) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the  
dial.  
(7) Repeat steps 5 and 6 until you have selected all characters and completed the  
title.  
(8) To finish making your own titles, turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
[SET], then press the dial.  
TITLE SET  
CUSTOM1 SET  
CUSTOM2 SET  
TITLE SET  
CUSTOM1 SET  
CUSTOM2 SET  
RETURN  
3
4
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
TITLE SET  
TITLE SET  
CUSTOM1 SET  
CUSTOM2 SET  
RETURN  
––––––––––––––––––––  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
TITLE SET  
TITLE SET  
1
3
2
4
–––––––––––––––––––  
–––––––––––––––––––  
5
7
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
TITLE SET  
––––––––––––––––––––  
TITLE SET  
S
–––––––––––––––––––  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
113  
Ma kin g yo u r o w n t it le s  
To ch a n g e a t it le yo u h a ve st o re d  
In step 4, select CUSTOM1 SET or CUSTOM2 SET, depending on which title you want  
to change, then press the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial. Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to  
select [C], then press the dial to delete the title. The last character is erased. Enter the  
new title as desired.  
If you take five minutes or longer to enter characters in the standby w hile a  
cassette is in your camcorder  
The power automatically goes off. The characters you have entered remain stored in  
memory. Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) once and then to CAMERA again, then  
proceed from step 1.  
We recommend setting the POWER switch to VCR or removing the cassette so that  
your camcorder does not automatically turn off while you are entering title characters.  
To delete the title  
Select [C]. The last character is erased.  
To enter a space  
Select [ Z& ? ! ], then select the blank part.  
114  
La b e lin g a ca sse t t e  
If you use a cassette with cassette memory, you can label a cassette. Labels can  
consist of up to 10 characters and is stored in cassette memory. When you insert  
the labeled cassette and when the POWER switch is set to CAMERA or VCR, the  
label is displayed for about five seconds.  
(1) Insert the cassette you want to label.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.  
(3) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select TAPE TITLE in  
then press the dial (p. 205). Tape title display appears.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the column of the desired character,  
then press the dial.  
,
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired character, then press the  
dial.  
(6) Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you finish the label.  
(7) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select [SET], then press the dial.  
The label is stored in memory.  
MENU  
3
4~6  
CM SET  
TAPE TITLE  
TAPE TITLE  
TITLE  
READY  
––––––––––  
––––––––––  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
CM SEARCH  
TAPE TITLE  
ERASE ALL  
RETURN  
CM SET  
TITLE  
[
ME
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
CM SEARCH  
TAPE TITLE  
ERASE ALL  
RETURN  
––––––––––  
TAPE TITLE  
TAPE TITLE  
TAPE TITLE  
M
––––––––––  
–––––––––  
[
ME
––––––––––  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
115  
La b e lin g a ca sse t t e  
To e ra se t h e la b e l yo u h a ve m a d e  
In step 4 turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select [C], then press the dial. The last  
character is erased.  
To ch a n g e t h e la b e l yo u h a ve m a d e  
Insert the cassette to change the label, and operate in the same way to make a new label.  
If you set the w rite-protect tab of the cassette to lock  
You cannot label the tape. Slide the write-protect tab to release the write protection.  
If the tape has too many index signal  
You may not be able to label a cassette because the cassette memory becomes full. In  
this case, delete data you do not need.  
If you have superimposed titles in the cassette  
When the label is displayed, up to four titles also appear.  
When the -----indicator has few er than 10 spaces  
The cassette memory is full.  
The -----indicates the number of characters you can select for the label.  
To enter a space  
Select [ Z& ? ! ], then select the blank part.  
Era sin g a ll t h e d a t a in ca sse t t e m e m o ry  
You can erase all the data in cassette memory at once.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA or VCR.  
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL in  
then press the dial (p. 205).  
,
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes  
to EXECUTE.  
CM SET  
TITLE  
CM SET  
TITLE  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
CM SEARCH  
TAPE TITLE  
ERASE ALL  
RETURN  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
CM SEARCH  
TAPE TITLE  
ERASE ALL  
RETURN  
RETURN  
OK  
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
ERASING flashes on the screen. When all the data is erased, COMPLETE is  
displayed.  
To ca n ce l d e le t in g  
Select RETURN with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial in step 3 or 4.  
116  
— “ Me m o ry St ickOp e ra t io n s —  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
You can record and play back images on a Memory Sticksupplied with your  
camcorder. You can easily play back, record or delete images. You can exchange image  
data with other equipment such as your computer etc., using the USB cable for  
Memory Sticksupplied with your camcorder.  
On file fo rm a t  
Still image (JPEG)  
Your camcorder compresses image data in JPEG format (extension .jpg).  
Moving picture (MPEG)  
Your camcorder compresses picture data in MPEG format (extension .mpg).  
Typ ica l im a g e d a t a file n a m e  
Still image  
100-0001:  
This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
Dsc00001.jpg: This file name appears on the display of your computer.  
Moving picture  
MOV00001:  
This file name appears on the screen of your camcorder.  
Mov00001.mpg: This file name appears on the display of your computer.  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick”  
Terminal  
Write-protect tab  
Labeling position  
You cannot record or erase images when the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick”  
is set to LOCK.  
The position and shape of the write-protect tab may be different depending on the  
model.  
We recommend backing up important data on the hard disk of your computer.  
Image data may be damaged in the following cases:  
If you eject the Memory Stickor turn the power off during reading or writing.  
If you use Memory Sticks near static electricity or magnetic fields.  
Prevent metallic objects or your finger from coming into contact with the metal parts  
of the terminal.  
Stick the label at the labeling position.  
Do not bend, drop or apply strong shock to Memory Sticks.  
Do not disassemble or modify Memory Sticks.  
Do not let Memory Sticks get wet.  
Do not use or keep Memory Sticks in locations that are:  
Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun or under the scorching sun.  
Under direct sunlight  
Very humid or subject to corrosive gases  
When you carry or store a Memory Stick,put it in its case.  
117  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Me m o ry St icks fo rm a t t e d o n co m p u t e r  
Memory Sticks formatted on Windows OS or Macintosh computers are not  
guaranteed compatible with your camcorder.  
No t e s o n im a g e d a t a co m p a t ib ilit y  
Image data files recorded on Memory Sticks by your camcorder conform with the  
Design Rules for Camera File Systems universal standard established by the JEITA  
(Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association). You cannot  
play back on your camcorder still images recorded on other equipment (DCR-  
TRV890E/ TRV900/ TRV900E or DSC-D700/ D770) that does not conform with this  
universal standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.)  
If you cannot use the Memory Stickthat is used with other equipment, format it  
with this camcorder (p. 204). However, formatting erases all information on the  
Memory Stick.”  
• “Memory Stickand  
are trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
All other product names mentioned here may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies.  
TMand ®are not mentioned in each case in this manual.  
118  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
In se rt in g a Me m o ry St ick”  
Insert a Memory Stickin the Memory Stickslot as far as it can go with the B mark  
facing as illustrated.  
Access lamp  
Memory Stickslot  
B mark  
Eje ct in g a Me m o ry St ick”  
Press the Memory Stickonce lightly.  
While the access lamp is lit or flashing  
Do not shake or knock your camcorder because your camcorder is reading the data  
from the Memory Stickor recording the data on the Memory Stick.Do not turn the  
power off, eject a Memory Stick.Otherwise, image data may become damaged.  
If “  
MEMORY STICK ERRORis displayed  
Reinsert Memory Sticka few times. The Memory Stickmay be damaged if the  
indicator is still displayed. If this occurs, use another Memory Stick.”  
119  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Usin g a t o u ch p a n e l  
Most operation buttons for use of Memory Sticks are displayed on the LCD screen.  
Touch the LCD screen directly with your finger or the supplied stylus (DCR-TRV50  
only) to operate each function.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make  
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press OPEN to open the LCD panel. Operation buttons appear on the LCD  
screen. You can switch the memory playback/ memory camera by pressing  
PLAY/ CAM.  
(3) Press FN. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.  
(4) Press PAGE2 to go to PAGE2. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.  
(5) Press PAGE3 to go to PAGE3. Operation buttons appear on the LCD screen.  
(6) Press a desired operation item.  
Refer to relevant pages for each function.  
3~6  
1
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
FN  
LOCK  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
In the memory camera  
1360  
SFN  
1/12  
PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 EXIT  
SELF  
TIMER  
SPOT PLAY INDEX SPOT  
FOCUS  
METER  
1360  
SFN  
1/12  
PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 EXIT  
LCD  
BRT  
PLAY INDEX  
MEM  
M I X  
2
In the memory  
camera  
In the memory  
playback (still  
image)  
1360  
SFN  
1/12  
PAGE1 PAGE2 PAGE3 EXIT  
SLIDE PLAY INDEX  
SHOW  
9PIC  
PRINT  
PLAY INDEX  
FN  
+
CAM INDEX  
FN  
120  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To e xe cu t e se t t in g s  
Press  
OK.  
To ca n ce l se t t in g s  
Press  
OFF to return to PAGE1/ PAGE2/ PAGE3.  
Notes  
When using the touch panel, press operation buttons with your thumb supporting the  
LCD screen from the back side of it or press those buttons lightly with your index  
finger.  
Do not press the LCD screen with sharp objects other than the supplied stylus. (DCR-  
TRV50 only)  
Do not press the LCD screen too hard.  
Do not touch the LCD screen with wet hands.  
If FN is not on the LCD screen, touch the LCD screen lightly to make it appear. You  
can control the display with DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL on your camcorder.  
When operation buttons do not work even if you press them, an adjustment is  
required (CALIBRATION) (p. 230).  
When the LCD screen gets dirty, clean it with the supplied cleaning cloth.  
When executing each item  
The green bar appears above the item.  
If the items are not available  
The color of the items changes to gray.  
Press FN to display the follow ing buttons:  
In the memory camera  
PAGE1  
PAGE2  
PAGE3  
SELFTIMER, SPOT FOCUS, PLAY, INDEX, SPOT METER  
LCD BRT, PLAY, INDEX, MEM MIX  
SLIDE SHOW, PLAY, INDEX, 9PIC PRINT  
In the memory playback  
+
PAGE1  
PAGE2  
PAGE3  
PB ZOOM, CAM, INDEX, DELETE,  
,
+
LCD BRT, CAM, INDEX, DATA CODE,  
,
+
SLIDE SHOW, CAM, INDEX, 9PIC PRINT,  
,
121  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Se le ct in g t h e st ill im a g e q u a lit y  
You can select the image quality in still image recording. The default setting is SUPER  
FINE.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.  
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU, then select STILL SET in  
with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial  
(p. 203).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select QUALITY , then press the dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image quality , then press  
the dial.  
1
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
LOCK  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
3
BURST  
QUALITY  
IMAGESIZE FINE  
RETURN STANDARD  
SUPER FINE  
REMAIN  
12  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
4
QUALITY  
STANDARD  
IMAGESIZE  
RETURN  
REMAIN  
36  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
122  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Im a g e q u a lit y se t t in g s  
Setting  
Meaning  
SUPER FINE (SFN)  
This is the highest image quality in your camcorder.  
The number of still images you can record is less than  
in FINE mode. Super fine images are compressed to  
about 1/ 3.  
FINE (FINE)  
Use this mode when you want to record high quality  
images. Fine images are compressed to about 1/ 6.  
STANDARD (STD)  
This is the standard image quality in your camcorder.  
Standard images are compressed to about 1/ 10.  
Note  
In some cases, changing the image quality may not affect the image quality, depending  
on the type of images you are shooting.  
Differences in image quality  
Recorded images are compressed in JPEG format before being stored in memory. The  
memory capacity allotted to each image varies depending on the selected image quality  
and image size. Details are shown in the table below. (You can select 1360 × 1020 or 640  
× 480 image size in the menu settings.)  
1360 × 1020 image size  
Image quality  
SUPER FINE  
FINE  
Memory capacity  
About 900 KB  
About 450 KB  
About 300 KB  
STANDARD  
640 × 480 image size  
Image quality  
SUPER FINE  
FINE  
Memory capacity  
About 190 KB  
About 100 KB  
About 60 KB  
STANDARD  
Image quality indicator  
The image quality indicator is not displayed during playback.  
When you select image quality  
The number of images you can shoot in the currently selected image quality appears on  
the screen.  
123  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Se le ct in g t h e im a g e size  
You can select either of two image sizes  
Still images:  
1360 × 1020 or 640 × 480. (When the POWER switch is set to CAMERA  
or VCR, the image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.)  
The default setting is 1360 × 1020.  
Moving pictures: 320 × 240 or 160 × 112  
The default setting is 320 × 240.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make  
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select STILL SET (still  
image) or MOVIE SET (moving picture) in  
, then press the dial (p. 203).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IMAGESIZE, then press the dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired image size, then press the  
dial.  
The indicator changes as follows:  
Still images:  
1360  
320  
640  
160  
Moving pictures:  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
1
3
4
VCR  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
1360  
MEMORY SET  
MOVIE SET  
320  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
IMAGESIZE 320 × 240  
REMAIN 160 × 112  
RETURN  
QUALITY  
IMAGESIZE 1360 × 1020  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
LOCK  
RETURN  
640 × 480  
REMAIN  
REMAIN  
12  
40sec  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
MEMORY SET  
MOVIE SET  
IMAGESIZE 160 × 112  
QUALITY  
REMAIN  
IMAGESIZE 640 × 480  
RETURN  
RETURN  
REMAIN  
REMAIN  
60  
2min  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MENU  
124  
Usin g a Me m o ry St ick” – In t ro d u ct io n  
Im a g e size se t t in g s  
Setting  
Meaning  
Indicator  
1360  
640  
1360 × 1020  
Records 1360 × 1020 still images.  
640 × 480  
320 × 240  
160 × 112  
Records 640 × 480 still images.  
Records 320 × 240 moving pictures.  
Records 160 × 112 moving pictures.  
320  
160  
Ap p ro xim a t e n u m b e r o f st ill im a g e s yo u ca n re co rd o n a  
Me m o ry St ick”  
The number of images you can record varies depending on which image quality and  
image size you select and the complexity of the subject.  
Type of Memory Sticks  
Image quality Image size  
8MB  
16MB  
32MB  
64MB  
128MB  
(supplied)  
(optional)  
(optional)  
(optional)  
(optional)  
1360 × 1020  
640 × 480 40 images  
1360 × 1020 17 images  
640 × 480 80 images 160 images 325 images 650 images 1310 images  
1360 × 1020 25 images 50 images 100 images 205 images 415 images  
640 × 480 120 images 240 images 485 images 980 images 1970 images  
8 images  
17 images  
35 images  
71 images 140 images  
SUPER FINE  
80 images 160 images 325 images 650 images  
34 images 69 images 140 images 280 images  
FINE  
STANDARD  
Ap p ro xim a t e t im e o f m o vin g p ict u re s yo u ca n re co rd o n a  
Me m o ry St ick”  
The time of moving pictures you can record varies depending on which image size you  
select and the complexity of the subject.  
Type of Memory Sticks  
Image size  
8MB  
16MB  
32MB  
64MB  
128MB  
(supplied)  
(optional)  
(optional)  
(optional)  
(optional)  
1 min.  
20 sec.  
2 min.  
40 sec.  
5 min.  
20 sec.  
10 min.  
40 sec.  
21 min.  
20 sec.  
320 × 240  
5 min.  
20 sec.  
10 min.  
40 sec.  
21 min.  
20 sec.  
42 min.  
40 sec.  
85 min.  
20 sec.  
160 × 112  
The table above shows approximate number and times of still images and moving  
pictures you can record on a Memory Stickformatted by your camcorder.  
Note  
When still images recorded on your camcorder in 1360 × 1020 size are played back on  
other equipment that does not support 1360 × 1020 size, the full image may not appear.  
125  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n Me m o ry  
St icks Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
You can record still images on Memory Sticks.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make  
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press PHOTO lightly. The green z mark stops flashing, then lights up. The  
brightness of the image and focus are adjusted, being targeted for the middle  
of the image and are fixed. Recording does not start yet.  
(3) Press PHOTO deeper.  
The still image will be displayed after the shutter sounds.  
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.  
The image when you pressed PHOTO deeper will be recorded on the  
Memory Stick.”  
[a ][b ]  
2
SFN  
1 / 12  
1360  
PHOTO  
PLAY INDEX  
FN  
SFN  
1360  
3
1
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
PLAY INDEX  
FN  
PHOTO  
LOCK  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
[a ]: Number of recorded images  
[b ]: Approximate number of images that can  
be recorded on the Memory Stick”  
Yo u ca n re co rd st ill im a g e s o n Me m o ry St icks in t h e t a p e  
re co rd in g o r t a p e re co rd in g st a n d b y  
For the details, see page 47.  
126  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n Me m o ry St icks  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)  
The following functions do not work:  
Wide mode  
Digital zoom  
SteadyShot  
Super NightShot  
Color Slow Shutter  
Fader  
Picture effect  
Digital effect  
Title  
Sports lesson of PROGRAM AE (The indicator flashes.)  
While you are recording a still image  
You can neither turn off the power nor press PHOTO.  
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press  
the button.  
When you press PHOTO lightly in step 2  
The image momentarily flickers. This is not a malfunction.  
Recording data  
The recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) are not displayed  
while recording. However, they are recorded automatically onto the Memory Stick.”  
To display the recording data, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also use  
the Remote Commander for this opration (p. 42).  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)  
The angle of view is slightly larger compared with the angle of view when the POWER  
switch is set to CAMERA.  
127  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n Me m o ry St icks  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Re co rd in g im a g e s co n t in u o u sly  
You can record still images continuously. Before recording, select one of the four modes  
described below in the menu settings.  
NORMAL [a ]  
Your camcorder shoots up to three still images in 1360 × 1020 size or nine still images in  
640 × 480 size at about 0.5 sec intervals. (  
)
HIGH SPEED [a ]  
Your camcorder shoots up to 16 still images in 640 × 480 size at about 0.07 sec intervals.  
(
)
EXP BRKTG (Exposure Bracketing)  
Your camcorder automatically shoots three images at about 0.5 sec intervals at different  
exposures. (  
)
MULTI SCRN (Multi Screen) [b ]  
Your camcorder shoots nine still images at about 0.4 sec intervals and displays the  
images on a single page divided into nine boxes. Still images are recorded in 640 × 480  
size. (  
)
[a]  
[b]  
128  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n Me m o ry St icks  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make  
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select STILL SET in  
then press the dial (p. 203).  
,
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select BURST, then press the dial.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired setting, then press the  
dial.  
(5) Press MENU to make the menu setting disappear.  
(6) Press PHOTO deeper.  
PHOTO  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
3
4
OFF  
OFF  
QUALITY  
QUALITY  
NORMAL  
IMAGESIZE  
RETURN  
IMAGESIZE HIGH SPEED  
RETURN  
EXP BRKTG  
MULTI SCRN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
BURST  
QUALITY  
IMAGESIZE  
RETURN  
OFF  
NORMAL  
HIGH SPEED  
QUALITY  
IMAGESIZE HIGH SPEED  
RETURN  
EXP BRKTG  
MULTI SCRN  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
If t h e ca p a cit y o f t h e Me m o ry St ickb e co m e s fu ll  
FULLappears on the screen, and you cannot record a still image on this Memory  
Stick.”  
The number of still images in continuous shooting  
The number of still images you can shoot continuously varies depending on the image  
size and the capacity of the Memory Stick.”  
During recording still images continuously  
The flash does not work.  
When shooting w ith the self-timer or the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder automatically records up to the maximum recordable number of still  
images.  
129  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n Me m o ry St icks  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
When selecting NORMAL or HIGH SPEED  
Recording continues up to the maximum number of still images during pressing  
PHOTO deeper. Release PHOTO to stop recording.  
When selecting HIGH SPEED  
Flickering or changes in color may occur. Also, your camcorder prevents focusing on  
near objects.  
If there is space remaining on the Memory Stickfor less than three photos  
You cannot carry out the exposure bracketing (EXP BRKTG). “  
FULLis displayed  
when you press PHOTO.  
The effect of exposure bracketing (EXP BRKTG)  
The effect may not appear clearly on the LCD screen.  
Checking images on a TV monitor or computer display for the expected effect is  
recommended.  
Re co rd in g im a g e s w it h t h e fla sh  
The flash automatically pops up to strobe. The default setting is auto (no indicator). To  
change the flash mode, press (flash) repeatedly until the flash mode indicator  
appears on the screen.  
(flash)  
Each press of (flash) changes the indicator as follows:  
t
t
t No indicator  
Auto red-eye reduction: The flash fires before recording to reduce the red-eye  
phenomenon.  
Forced flash:  
No flash:  
The flash fires regardless of the surrounding brightness.  
The flash does not fire.  
The flash is automatically adjusted to the appropriate brightness. You can also change  
FLASH LVL to the desired brightness in the menu settings (p. 200). Try recording  
various images to find the most appropriate setting for FLASH LVL.  
130  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n Me m o ry St icks  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Notes  
The recommended shooting distance using the built-in flash is 0.3 m to 2.5 m (31/ 32  
feet to 8 1/ 3 feet).  
Attaching the lens hood (supplied) or a conversion lens (optional) may block the light  
from the flash or cause lens shadow to appear.  
You cannot use an external flash (optional) and the built-in flash at the same time.  
(auto red-eye reduction) may not produce the desired effect depending on  
individual differences, the distance to the subject, the subject not looking at the pre-  
recording flash or other conditions.  
The flash effect cannot be obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright  
location.  
If it is not easy to focus on a subject automatically, for example, when recording in the  
dark, use HOLOGRAM AF (p. 132) or the focal distance information (p. 70) for  
focusing manually.  
If you leave your camcorder for five or more minutes after disconnecting the  
pow er supply  
Your camcorder returns to the default setting (auto).  
The flash does not fire even if you select auto and  
during the follow ing operations:  
NightShot  
(auto red-eye reduction)  
Exposure  
Flexible Spot meter  
Spotlight of PROGRAM AE  
Sunset & moon of PROGRAM AE  
Landscape of PROGRAM AE  
When you use an external flash (optional) w hich does not have the auto red-eye  
reduction  
You cannot select the auto red-eye reduction.  
During recording images continuously  
The flash does not work.  
131  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n Me m o ry St icks  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Sh o o t in g w it h a n a u xilia ry lig h t HOLOGRAM AF  
The HOLOGRAM AF is an auxiliary light source used for focusing on subjects in dark  
places.  
Set HOLOGRAM F in  
to AUTO in the menu settings. (The default setting is AUTO.)  
When appears on the screen in a dark place, press PHOTO lightly. Then the  
auxiliary light will automatically emit until the subject is focused.  
HOLOGRAM AF emitter  
Ab o u t HOLOGRAM AF  
HOLOGRAM AF (Auto-Focus),an application of laser holograms, is a new AF  
optical system that enables still image shooting in dark places. Having gentler radiation  
than conventional high-brightness LEDs or lamps, the system satisfies Laser Class 1 (*)  
specification and thus maintains higher safety for human eyes.  
No safety problems will be caused by directly looking into the HOLOGRAM AF emitter  
at a close range. However, it is not recommended to do so, because you may experience  
such effects like several minutes of image residual and dazzling, that you encounter  
after looking into a flashlight.  
* HOLOGRAM AF satisfies Class 1(time base 30 000 seconds), specified in all of JIS  
(Japan), IEC(EU), and FDA(US) industry standards.  
Complying with these standards identifies the laser product to be safe, under a  
condition that a human looks at the laser light either directly or even through a lens  
for 30 000 seconds.  
132  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n Me m o ry St icks  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Notes  
A conversion lens (optional) may obstruct the HOLOGRAM AF light and make  
focusing difficult.  
If enough light does not reach the subject even if the HOLOGRAM AF emitter is  
emitted (recommended shooting distance is 2.5 m (8 1/ 3 feet)), the subject will not be  
focused.  
Focusing may be hampered if the light emitted from the HOLOGRAM AF is blocked  
by an obstruction.  
Focus is achieved as long as HOLOGRAM AF light reaches to the subject even if its  
light is slightly out of the middle position of the subject.  
If HOLOGRAM AF light is dim, it sometimes becomes difficult to focus. If this  
happens, wipe the HOLOGRAM AF emitter with a soft, dry cloth.  
The HOLOGRAM AF does not emit w hen:  
Flash is set to  
No flash  
NightShot is set to ON  
Focusing manually  
Using Spot Focus  
Sunset & moon of PROGRAM AE  
Landscape of PROGRAM AE  
Continuous photo recording  
When you use the external flash (optional)  
HOLOGRAM AF emits.  
133  
Re co rd in g st ill im a g e s o n Me m o ry St icks  
Me m o ry Ph o t o re co rd in g  
Se lf-t im e r m e m o ry p h o t o re co rd in g  
You can record images on Memory Sticks with the self-timer. You can also use the  
Remote Commander for this operation.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make  
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press SELFTIMER.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(4) Press PHOTO deeper.  
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of  
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.  
4
PHOTO  
PHOTO  
2
FN  
To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r  
Press SELFTIMER so that the  
(self-timer) indicator disappears on the screen. You  
cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote Commander.  
Note  
The self-timer recording is automatically canceled when:  
Self-timer recording is finished.  
The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.  
134  
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill  
im a g e s  
Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it as a still  
image on a Memory Stick.Your camcorder can also capture moving picture data  
through the input connector and record it as a still image on a Memory Stick.”  
Before operation  
Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder.  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press N. Moving pictures recorded on the tape are played back.  
(3) Press PHOTO lightly until picture you want to capture from the tape freezes  
and CAPTURE appears on the screen. Recording does not start yet.  
To change from the image selected to another image, release PHOTO once and  
press it lightly again.  
(4) Press PHOTO deeper. The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on  
the Memory Stick.Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator  
disappears.  
2
REW  
PLAY  
FF  
[a ][b ]  
3
4
SFN  
SFN  
1 / 12  
CAPTURE  
640  
640  
PHOTO  
PB  
INDEX  
FN  
PB  
INDEX  
FN  
PHOTO  
[a ]: Number of recorded images  
[b ]: Approximate number of images that can  
be recorded on the Memory Stick”  
135  
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill im a g e s  
Image size of still images  
Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.  
When the access lamp is lit or flashing  
Do not shake or strike the unit. Also, do not turn the power off , eject a Memory Stick.”  
Otherwise, image data may become damaged.  
If “ ” appears on the screen  
The inserted Memory Stickis incompatible with your camcorder because its format  
does not conform with your camcorder. Check the format of the Memory Stick.”  
If you press PHOTO lightly in the playback  
Your camcorder stops momentarily.  
Sound recorded on a tape  
You cannot record audio from a tape.  
Titles already recorded on cassettes  
You cannot record titles on Memory Sticks. Titles do not appear while you are  
recording a still image with PHOTO.  
Recording date/time  
The recording data (date/ time) when it is recorded on a Memory Stickis recorded.  
Various settings are not recorded.  
Data codes recorded on a tape cannot be recorded on a Memory Stick.  
When you press PHOTO on the Remote Commander  
Your camcorder immediately records the image that is on the screen when you press  
the button.  
136  
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill im a g e s  
Re co rd in g a st ill im a g e fro m e xt e rn a l e q u ip m e n t  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY in  
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program.  
The image of the external equipment is displayed on the screen.  
(3) Follow steps 3 and 4 on page 135.  
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
Yellow  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VCR  
: Signal flow  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
Connect the yellow plug of the A/ V connecting cable to the video jack on the VCR or  
the TV.  
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
TV or VCR.  
137  
Re co rd in g im a g e s fro m a t a p e a s st ill im a g e s  
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le (DV co n n e ct in g ca b le )  
DV IN/OUT  
DV  
DV OUT  
: Signal flow  
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)  
Note  
In the following instances, recording is interrupted or “  
REC ERRORis displayed,  
and recording is not possible. Record distortion-free images.  
When recording on a tape in a poor recording state, for example, on a tape that has  
been repeatedly used for dubbing  
When attempting to input images that are distorted due to poor radio wave reception  
when a TV tuner unit is in use  
138  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e  
Me m o ry St icko n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
You can superimpose a still image you have recorded on the Memory Stickon the  
moving picture you are recording. You can record the superimposed images on a tape  
or a Memory Stick.(However, you can record only superimposed still images on the  
Memory Stick.)  
M. CHROM (memory chroma key)  
You can swap a blue area of a still image such as an illustration or a frame with a  
moving picture.  
M. LUMI (memory luminance key)  
You can swap a brighter area of a still image such as a handwritten illustration or title  
with a moving picture. Record a title on the Memory Stickbefore a trip or event for  
convenience.  
C. CHROM (camera chroma key)  
You can superimpose a moving picture on a still image such as an image that can be  
used as background. Shoot the subject against a blue background. The blue area of the  
moving picture will be swapped with a still image.  
M. OVERLAP* (memory overlap)  
You can make a moving picture fade in on top of a still image recorded on the Memory  
Stickas the overlap.  
Still image  
Moving picture  
M. CHROM  
CAM  
M
CHROM  
Blue  
Still image  
Moving picture  
Moving picture  
Blue  
M. LUMI  
M
CAM  
L UM I  
Still image  
Still image  
C. CHROM  
CAM  
M
CHROM  
Moving picture  
M. OVERLAP*  
OV ER –  
L A P  
* The superimposed image using Memory overlap can be recorded on tapes only.  
139  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e Me m o ry St icko n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
Re co rd in g su p e rim p o se d im a g e s o n a t a p e  
Before operation  
Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder.  
Insert a Memory Stickrecorded still images into your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press MEM MIX. The last recorded or last composed image appears on the  
lower part of the screen as a thumbnail image.  
(4) Press / + on the right lower corner of the screen to select the still image which  
you want to superimpose.  
: To see the previous image  
+: To see the next image  
(5) Press a desired mode. The still image is superimposed on the moving picture.  
(6) Press / + on the left lower corner of the screen to adjust the effect, then press  
OK to return to PAGE1.  
M. CHROM:  
M. LUMI:  
Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a  
still image and superimpose it on a moving image  
Brightness level used when extracting a still image and  
superimposing it on a moving image  
C. CHROM:  
Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a  
moving picture and superimpose it on a still image  
M. OVERLAP: No adjustment necessary  
The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect.  
(7) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
(8) Press START/ STOP to start recording.  
140  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e Me m o ry St icko n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
1
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
MEM MIX  
3,4  
OFF MCCAM OVER-  
OK  
LUMI  
LAP  
MEM  
MIX  
CAMCM MCCAM  
CHROM CHROM  
Still image  
1000001  
+
MEM MIX  
OFF  
2
5
6
OK  
M. LUMI  
+
+
1000001  
+
FN  
+
MEM MIX  
OFF  
OK  
M. LUMI  
1000001  
+
+
To ch a n g e t h e st ill im a g e t o b e su p e rim p o se d  
Press / + on the right lower corner before step 6.  
To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX  
Press  
OFF to return to PAGE1.  
Notes  
You cannot use the MEMORY MIX for moving pictures recorded on Memory Sticks.  
When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of  
the picture may not be clear.  
Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment  
You may not be able to play back modified images with your camcorder.  
When you select M. OVERLAP  
You cannot change the still image or the mode setting.  
During recording  
You cannot change the mode setting.  
To record the superimposed image as a still image  
Press PHOTO deeper in step 8 (You should set PHOTO REC in  
menu settings beforehand).  
to TAPE in the  
141  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e Me m o ry St icko n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
Re co rd in g su p e rim p o se d im a g e s o n a Me m o ry St icka s a st ill  
im a g e  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickrecorded still images into your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make  
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press FN and select PAGE2.  
(3) Press MEM MIX. The last recorded or last composed image appears on the  
lower part of the screen as a thumbnail image.  
(4) Press / + on the right lower corner of the screen to select the still image which  
you want to superimpose.  
: To see the previous image  
+: To see the next image  
(5) Press a desired mode. The still image is superimposed on the moving picture.  
(6) Press / + on the left lower corner of the screen to adjust the effect, then press  
OK to return to PAGE2.  
M. CHROM:  
M. LUMI:  
Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a  
still image and superimpose it on a moving image  
Brightness level used when extracting a still image and  
superimposing it on a moving image  
C. CHROM:  
Blue chroma key (only blue background portion) to extract a  
moving picture and superimpose it on a still image  
The fewer bars there are on the screen, the stronger the effect.  
(7) Press EXIT to return to FN.  
(8) Press PHOTO deeper to start recording.  
The image displayed on the screen will be recorded on a Memory Stick.”  
Recording is complete when the bar scroll indicator disappears.  
142  
Su p e rim p o sin g a st ill im a g e in t h e Me m o ry St icko n a n im a g e  
MEMORY MIX  
1
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
MEM MIX  
3,4  
OFF MCCAM  
OK  
LUMI  
MEM  
MIX  
CAMCM MCCAM  
CHROM CHROM  
Still image  
1000001  
+
MEM MIX  
OFF  
2
5
6
OK  
M. LUMI  
+
+
1000001  
+
FN  
+
MEM MIX  
OFF  
OK  
M. LUMI  
1000001  
+
+
To ch a n g e t h e st ill im a g e t o b e su p e rim p o se d  
Press / + on the right lower corner before step 6.  
To ca n ce l MEMORY MIX  
Press  
OFF to return to PAGE2.  
Notes  
You cannot use MEMORY MIX for moving pictures recorded on Memory Sticks.  
When the overlapping still image has a large amount of white, the thumbnail image of  
the picture may not be clear.  
Image size of still pictures  
Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.  
Image data modified w ith your computers or shot w ith other equipment  
You may not be able to play back modified images with your camcorder.  
During recording  
You cannot change the mode setting.  
When recording images on a Memory Stickusing the MEMORY MIX  
The PROGRAM AE does not work. (The indicator flashes.)  
The Memory Sticksupplied w ith your camcorder stores 20 images  
For M. CHROM: 18 images (such as a frame) 100-0001~100-0018  
For C. CHROM: two images (such as a background) 100-0019~100-0020  
Sample images  
Sample images stored in the Memory Sticksupplied with your camcorder are  
protected (p. 167).  
143  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n Me m o ry  
St icks MPEG m o vie re co rd in g  
You can record moving pictures with sound on Memory Sticks.  
The picture and sound and recorded up to the capacity of Memory Stick(MPEG  
MOVIE EX).  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make  
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press START/ STOP. Your camcorder starts recording. The camera recording  
lamp located on the front of your camcorder lights up. The picture and sound  
are recorded up to the remaining capacity of Memory Stick. For more  
information about recording time, see page 125.  
:
40min 320REC  
0:00 03  
2
15min  
[a ]  
BBB  
[b ]  
PLAY INDEX  
FN  
[a ]:  
Recording time that can be recorded on  
the Memory Stick.  
[a ] [b ]: These indicators are displayed for five  
seconds after pressing START/ STOP.  
This indicator is not recorded.  
To st o p re co rd in g  
Press START/ STOP.  
144  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n Me m o ry St icks  
MPEG m o vie re co rd in g  
Note  
Sound is recorded in monaural.  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)  
The following functions do not work:  
Wide mode  
Digital zoom  
SteadyShot  
Super NightShot  
Color Slow Shutter  
Fader  
Picture effect  
Digital effect  
Title  
Sports lesson of PROGRAM AE (The indicator flashes.)  
When using an external flash (optional)  
Turn the power of the external flash off when recording moving pictures on Memory  
Sticks. Otherwise, the charging sound for the flash may be recorded.  
Recording date/time  
The date/ time are not displayed while recording. However, they are automatically  
recorded onto the Memory Stick.”  
To display the recording date/ time, press DATA CODE during playback. You can also  
use the Remote Commander for this operation (p. 42). Various settings cannot be  
recorded.  
During recording on Memory Stick”  
Do not eject the cassette tape from your camcorder. During ejecting the tape, sound is  
recorded on the Memory Stick.”  
When the POWER sw itch is set to MEMORY/NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)  
The angle of view is slightly larger compared with the angle of view when the POWER  
switch is set to CAMERA.  
145  
Re co rd in g m o vin g p ict u re s o n Me m o ry St icks  
MPEG m o vie re co rd in g  
Se lf-t im e r MPEG m o vie re co rd in g  
You can record moving pictures on Memory Sticks with the self-timer. You can also  
use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make  
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(3) Press SELFTIMER.  
The  
(self-timer) indicator appears on the screen.  
(4) Press START/ STOP.  
Self-timer starts counting down from 10 with a beep. In the last two seconds of  
the countdown, the beep gets faster, then recording starts automatically.  
START/STOP  
2
FN  
4
To st o p t h e co u n t d o w n  
Press START/ STOP. To restart the self-timer, press START/ STOP again.  
To ca n ce l t h e se lf-t im e r  
Press SELFTIMER so that the  
(self-timer) indicator disappears on the screen. You  
cannot cancel self-timer using the Remote Commander.  
Note  
The self-timer recording is automatically canceled when:  
Self-timer recording is finished.  
The POWER switch is set to OFF (CHG) or VCR.  
146  
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m t a p e a s a m o vin g  
p ict u re  
Your camcorder can read moving picture data recorded on a tape and record it as a  
moving picture on a Memory Stick.Your camcorder can also capture moving picture  
data through the input connector and record it as a moving picture on a Memory  
Stick.”  
Before operation  
Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder.  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press N. The picture recorded on the tape is played back.  
And press X at the scene where you want to start recording from.  
(3) Press START/ STOP on your camcorder. The picture and sound are recorded  
up to the remaining capacity of the Memory Stick. For more information  
about recording time, see page 125.  
:
:
:
40min  
N
0 15 42 43  
3
:
320REC 0:00 03  
15min  
[a ]  
BBB  
[b ]  
PB  
INDEX  
FN  
[a ]:  
The recording time that can be  
recorded on the Memory Stick.”  
2
PLAY  
PAUSE  
[a ] [b ]: This indicator is displayed for  
five seconds after pressing START/  
STOP. This indicator is not recorded.  
To st o p re co rd in g  
Press START/ STOP.  
147  
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Notes  
Sound recorded in 48 kHz is converted to 32 kHz sound when recording images from  
a tape to Memory Sticks.  
Sound recorded in stereo is converted to monaural sound when recording from tape.  
When the access lamp is lit or flashing  
Do not shake or knock the unit. Also, do not turn the power off , eject a Memory  
Stick. Otherwise, image data may become damaged.  
Titles already recorded on cassettes  
You cannot record titles on Memory Sticks. Titles do not appear while you are  
recording moving picture with START/ STOP.  
If “  
AUDIO ERRORis displayed  
Sound that cannot be recorded by your camcorder has been recorded. Connect the A/ V  
connecting cable to input images from external equipment used to play back the image  
(p. 149).  
Recording date/time  
The recording data (date/ time) when it is recorded on Memory Stickis recorded.  
Various settings are not recorded.  
Data codes recorded on a tape cannot be recorded on a Memory Stick.  
148  
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Re co rd in g a m o vin g p ict u re fro m e xt e rn a l e q u ip m e n t  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY in  
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Play back the recorded tape, or turn the TV on to see the desired program.  
The image of the other equipment is displayed on the screen.  
(3) Follow the procedure on page 147 from the step 3 onwards at the point where  
you want to start recording from.  
Usin g t h e A/V co n n e ct in g ca b le  
S VIDEO  
OUT  
AUDIO/  
VIDEO  
Yellow  
White  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
VCR  
: Signal flow  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied)  
Red  
If your TV or VCR has an S video jack  
Pictures can be reproduced more faithfully by using an S video cable (optional).  
With this connection, you do not need to connect the yellow (video) plug of the A/ V  
connecting cable.  
Connect an S video cable (optional) to the S video jacks of both your camcorder and the  
TV or VCR.  
149  
Re co rd in g p ict u re s fro m t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Usin g t h e i.LINK ca b le (DV co n n e ct in g ca b le )  
DV  
DV IN/OUT  
DV OUT  
: Signal flow  
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)  
Note  
In the following instances, “  
REC ERRORis displayed and you cannot record  
pictures.  
When recording on a tape in a poor recording state, for example, on a tape that has  
been repeatedly used for dubbing  
When attempting to input images that are distorted due to poor radio wave reception  
when a TV tuner unit is in use  
When the input signal is cut off  
During recording on Memory Stick”  
Do not eject the cassette tape from your camcorder.  
150  
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s  
a m o vin g p ict u re Dig it a l p ro g ra m  
e d it in g (o n Me m o ry St icks)  
You can duplicate selected scenes (programs) for editing onto Memory Sticks.  
Ma kin g t h e p ro g ra m  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Insert the tape for playback, and a Memory Stickfor recording into your  
camcorder.  
(3) Press MENU and turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in  
then press the dial (p. 209).  
,
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select MEMORY, then press the dial.  
(5) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select IMAGESIZE and select the desired  
image size, then press the dial.  
(6) Search for the beginning of the first scene you want to insert using the video  
operation buttons, then pause playback.  
You can fine-adjust one frame at a time with EDITSEARCH.  
(7) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to  
select MARK, the press the dial.  
The IN point of the first program is set, and the top part of the program mark  
changes to light blue.  
(8) Search for the end of the first scene you want to insert using the video  
operation buttons, then pause playback.  
(9) Press MARK on the Remote Commander, or the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial.  
The OUT point of the first program is set, then the bottom part of the program  
mark changes to light blue.  
(10)Repeat steps 6 to 9, then set the program.  
When one program is set, the program mark changes to light blue.  
You can set 20 programs in maximum.  
6,8  
REW  
PLAY  
STOP  
FF  
PAUSE  
MENU  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
VIDEO EDIT  
N X 0 08 55 06  
OUT  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
N X 0 08 58 06  
IN  
VIDEO EDIT  
MARK  
N X 0 10 01 23  
IN  
MARK  
1
2
4
7
9
10  
UNDO  
UNDO  
UNDO  
ERASE ALL  
START  
ERASE ALL  
START  
IMAGESIZE  
ERASE ALL  
START  
IMAGESIZE  
IMAGESIZE  
:
:
:
:
:
:
TOTAL 0 00 00  
SCENE  
TOTAL 0 00 12  
SCENE  
TOTAL 0 00 31  
SCENE  
0
2min  
1
2min  
3
2min  
320  
320  
320  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
151  
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n Me m o ry St icks)  
Era sin g t h e p ro g ra m yo u h a ve se t  
Erase OUT first and then IN from of the last program.  
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select UNDO, then press the dial.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
The last set program mark flashes, then the setting is canceled.  
To cancel erasing  
Select RETURN with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial in step 2.  
Era sin g a ll p ro g ra m s  
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings,  
then select MEMORY, then press the dial.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select ERASE ALL, then select EXECUTE,  
then press the dial.  
All the program marks flash, then the settings are canceled.  
To cancel erasing all programs  
Select RETURN with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial in step 2.  
To cancel a program you have set  
Press MENU.  
The program is stored in memory until the tape is ejected.  
Notes  
You cannot dub the titles, display indicators, or the contents of cassette memory.  
You cannot operate recording during the Digital program editing on Memory  
Sticks.  
On a blank portion of the tape  
You cannot set IN or OUT on a blank portions of the tape.  
If there is a blank portion betw een IN and OUT on the tape  
The total time code may not be displayed correctly.  
During making a program  
If you eject the cassette, NOT READY appears on the screen. The program will be  
erased.  
152  
Re co rd in g e d it e d p ict u re s fro m a t a p e a s a m o vin g p ict u re  
Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g (o n Me m o ry St icks)  
Pe rfo rm in g t h e p ro g ra m (Du b b in g o n a Me m o ry St ick)  
(1) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select VIDEO EDIT in the menu settings,  
then select MEMORY, then press the dial.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select START, then select EXECUTE, then  
press the dial.  
Search for the beginning of the first program, then start dubbing.  
The program mark flashes.  
The SEARCH indicator appears during search, and the EDITING indicator  
appears during writing of data on your camcorder, and REC appears during  
dubbing on the screen.  
The program mark changes to light blue after dubbing is complete.  
When the dubbing ends, your camcorder automatically stops.  
To st o p d u b b in g d u rin g e d it in g  
Press x using the video operation buttons.  
The program you made is recorded on a Memory Stickup to the place where you  
pressed x.  
To e n d t h e Dig it a l p ro g ra m e d it in g  
Your camcorder stops when the dubbing ends. Then the display returns to VIDEO  
EDIT in the menu settings.  
Press MENU to end the Digital program editing.  
NOT READY appears on the LCD screen w hen:  
The program to operate the Digital program editing has not been made.  
The Memory Stickis not inserted.  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to LOCK.  
When Memory Stickdoes not have enough space to record  
LOW MEMORY appears on the screen. However, you can record pictures up to the  
time indicated.  
153  
Co p yin g st ill im a g e s fro m a t a p e  
PHOTO SAVE  
Using the search function, you can automatically capture only still images from tapes  
and record them on a Memory Stickin sequence.  
Before operation  
Insert a recorded tape into your camcorder and rewind the tape.  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press MENU and turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select PHOTO SAVE in  
, then press the dial (p. 204).  
PHOTO BUTTON appears on the screen.  
(3) Press PHOTO deeper. The still images from the tape are recorded on the  
Memory Stick.The number of still images copied is displayed. END is  
displayed when copying ends.  
:
:
:
:
:
:
PHOTO SAVE  
0 00 00 00  
PHOTO SAVE  
0 30 00 00  
3
2
4/15  
640STD  
8/15  
640STD  
SAVING  
END  
0
4
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
PHOTO  
:
:
:
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
PHOTO SAVE  
FILE NO.  
PHOTO SAVE  
0 00 00 00  
4/15  
640STD  
READY  
RETURN  
PHOTO BUTTON  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
[
] :  
PHOTO START MENU END  
MENU  
To st o p co p yin g  
Press MENU or x.  
Wh e n t h e Me m o ry St ickb e co m e s fu ll  
MEMORY FULL appears on the screen, and copying stops. Insert another Memory  
Stickand repeat the procedure from step 2.  
154  
Co p yin g st ill im a g e s fro m a t a p e PHOTO SAVE  
Image size of still images  
Image size is automatically set to 640 × 480.  
When the access lamp is lit or flashing  
Do not shake or knock your camcorder. As well do not turn the power off, eject a  
Memory Stick. Otherwise, image data may become damaged.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to LOCK  
NOT READY appears when you select the item in the menu settings.  
When you change Memory Sticks during copying  
Your camcorder resumes copying from the last image recorded on the previous  
Memory Stick.”  
155  
Vie w in g st ill im a g e s  
Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
You can play back still images recorded on a Memory Stick.You can also play back  
six images including moving pictures in order at a time by selecting the index screen.  
You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.  
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press PLAY or  
PB. The last recorded image is displayed.  
(3) Press / + on your camcorder to select the desired still image.  
: To see the previous image  
+: To see the next image  
2
PB  
PLAY  
To st o p Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
Press CAM, VCR on your camcorder or MEMORY PLAY button on the Remote  
Commander.  
156  
Vie w in g st ill im a g e s Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
You may not be able to play back images w ith your camcorder:  
When playing back image data modified on your computer.  
When playing back image data shot with other equipment.  
Notes on the file name  
The directory number may not be displayed and only the file name may be displayed  
if the structure of the directory does not conform to the DCF standard.  
• “  
- DIRECTORY ERRORmay appear on screen if the structure of the directory  
does not conform to the DCF standard. While this message appears, you can play back  
images but cannot record them on the Memory Stick.”  
The file name flashes on the screen if the file is corrupted or the file is unreadable.  
To play back recorded images on a TV screen  
Before operation, connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable  
supplied with your camcorder.  
When operating memory photo playback on a TV or on the LCD screen, image quality  
may appear to have deteriorated. This is not a malfunction. The image data is as good  
as ever.  
Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be  
output from the TV speakers.  
Still image  
You can select still images also with / + on PAGE1/ PAGE2/ PAGE3.  
When no image is recorded on the Memory Stick”  
When you press MEMORY PLAY on the Remote Commander, “  
NO FILEappears.  
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g st ill im a g e p la yb a ck  
Image size  
Image number/ Total number of recorded images  
6/100  
MEMORY PLAY  
1360  
1000006  
Print mark  
Protect  
JUL 4 2002  
12:05:56 AM  
Recording date/ time/ various settings  
+
CAM INDEX  
FN  
When the POWER switch is set to VCR, VCR is  
displayed instead of CAM  
Data Directory Number, File Number  
Recording data  
You can view recording data (date/ time or various settings when recorded) when you  
press DATA CODE on PAGE2. You can also use the Remote Commander for this  
operation.  
To make screen indicators disappear  
Press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL.  
157  
Vie w in g st ill im a g e s Me m o ry Ph o t o p la yb a ck  
Pla yin g b a ck six re co rd e d im a g e s a t a t im e (in d e x scre e n )  
You can play back six recorded images at a time. This function is especially useful when  
searching for a particular image.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.  
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press INDEX to display the index screen.  
A red B mark appears above the image that is displayed before changing to the index  
screen mode.  
T : To display the previous six images  
t : To display the following six images  
B mark  
-
MARK  
MARK  
DEL  
2
EXIT  
3
1
4
5
6
T
1 / 40  
t
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To re t u rn t o t h e n o rm a l p la yb a ck scre e n (sin g le scre e n )  
Press the image you want to display.  
Note  
When displaying the index screen, the number appears above each image. This  
indicates the order in which images are recorded on the Memory Stick.These  
numbers are different from the data file names.  
Image data modified on your computer or shot w ith other equipment  
These files are sometimes not displayed on the index screen.  
158  
Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s  
MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck  
You can play back moving pictures recorded on a Memory Stick.You can also play  
back six images including still images in order at a time by selecting the index screen.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.  
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press PLAY or  
PB.  
(3) Press / + to select the desired moving pictures.  
: To see the previous picture  
+ : To see the next picture  
(4) Press MPEG N X to start playback.  
(5) To adjust the volume, press either of the two buttons on VOLUME.  
: To turn down  
+ : To turn up  
When you close the LCD panel, sound is muted.  
VOLUME  
2
PB  
PLAY  
To st o p MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck  
Press MPEG N X.  
You may not be able to play back images w ith your camcorder:  
When playing back image data modified on your computer.  
When playing back image data shot with other equipment.  
To play back recorded picutres on a TV screen  
Before operation connect your camcorder to the TV with the A/ V connecting cable  
supplied with your camcorder.  
Turn the audio volume of the TV down before operation, or noise (howling) may be  
output from the TV speakers.  
Moving picture  
You can select moving pictures also with / + on PAGE1/ PAGE2/ PAGE3.  
When no image is recorded on the Memory Stick”  
When you press MEMORY PLAY on the Remote Commander, “  
NO FILEappears.  
159  
Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck  
Pla yin g b a ck a m o vin g p ict u re fro m t h e d e sire d p a rt  
The moving picture recorded on Memory Stickis divided into 23 parts.  
You can select every each one point and play back pictures.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.  
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press PLAY or  
PB.  
(3) Press +/ to select the desired moving pictures.  
: To see the previous picture  
+ : To see the next picture  
(4) Press </ , to select the point where you want to play back.  
< :To see previous part  
, :To see next part  
1/2  
00 00  
320  
:
:
MOV00001  
0
MPEG  
N X  
+
CAM INDEX  
FN  
(5) Press MPEG N X to start playback.  
To st o p MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck  
Press MPEG N X.  
When recording time is too short  
The moving picture may not be divided into 23 parts.  
160  
Vie w in g m o vin g p ict u re s MPEG m o vie p la yb a ck  
Scre e n in d ica t o rs d u rin g m o vin g p ict u re p la yb a ck  
Image size  
Picture number/ Total number of recorded pictures  
1/20  
01 00  
320  
:
:
MOV00001  
0
MPEG  
N X  
–––  
JUL 4 2002  
Protect  
12 : 05 : 56  
+
CAM INDEX  
FN  
When the POWER switch is set to VCR, VCR is  
displayed instead of CAM.  
Recording date/ time. (Various settings are displayed as “– – –”.)  
Data directory number/ File number  
Recording date/time  
You can view recording date/ time when you press DATA CODE on PAGE2. Various  
settings are not recorded. You can also use the Remote Commander for this operation.  
(p. 42)  
To make screen indicator disappear  
Press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL.  
161  
Co p yin g im a g e s re co rd e d o n Me m o ry  
St icks t o t a p e  
You can copy images recorded on Memory Sticks and record them to tape.  
Before operation  
Insert a tape for recording into your camcorder.  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Using the video control buttons, search a point where you want to record the  
desired images. Set the tape to playback pause.  
(3) Press z REC and the button on its right simultaneously on your camcorder.  
The tape is set to the recording pause.  
(4) Press  
PB. The last recorded image is displayed.  
(5) Press +/ to select the desired image.  
: To see the previous image  
+ : To see the next image  
(6) Press X to start recording and press X again to stop.  
z appears on the screen during recording.  
(7) If you have more to copy, repeat steps 5 and 6.  
4
PB  
3
2
REC  
PAUSE  
To st o p co p yin g in t h e m id d le  
Press x.  
162  
Co p yin g im a g e s re co rd e d o n Me m o ry St icks t o t a p e  
During copying  
You cannot operate the following functions:  
MEMORY PLAY  
MEMORY INDEX  
MEMORY DELETE  
MEMORY +/ –  
Note on the index screen  
You cannot record the index screen.  
If you press EDITSEARCH during pause  
Memory playback stops.  
Image data modified on your computers or shot w ith other equipment  
You may not be able to copy modified images with your camcorder.  
When copying movies  
After step 6, press the MPEG N X and play back the image.  
163  
En la rg in g st ill im a g e s re co rd e d o n  
Me m o ry St icks Me m o ry PB ZOOM  
You can enlarge still images recorded on a Memory Stick.You can select and view a  
desired part from the enlarged still image. Also, you can copy the desired part of the  
enlarged still image to tapes or Memory Sticks.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Press FN  
to display PAGE1 during the memory playback (p. 120).  
When you set the POWER switch to VCR, press FN and select PAGE2 during  
the memory playback (p. 24).  
(2) Press PB ZOOM. PB ZOOM screen appears.  
(3) Press the area that you want to enlarge in the frame on the PB ZOOM screen.  
The area you pressed moves to the center of the screen, and the playback  
image is enlarged approximately at twice the size. If you press the other area,  
the area moves to the center of the screen.  
(4) Adjust the zoom ratio by the power zoom lever.  
You can enlarge the image from approximately 1.1 times up to five times its  
size.  
W : Decreases the zoom ratio  
T : Increases the zoom ratio  
3/14  
1360  
PB ZOOM  
× 5.0  
4
MEMORY PLAY  
T
W
1
2
1000003  
END  
FN  
3/14  
1360  
PB ZOOM  
PB  
ZOOM  
MEMORY PLAY  
1000003  
END  
To ca n ce l PB ZOOM  
Press  
END.  
164  
En la rg in g st ill im a g e s re co rd e d o n Me m o ry St icks  
Me m o ry PB ZOOM  
The PB ZOOM is canceled w hen the follow ing operations:  
MENU  
MEMORY PLAY  
MEMORY INDEX  
MEMORY +/ –  
Moving pictures recorded on Memory Sticks  
The PB ZOOM does not work.  
To record the still image processed by Memory PB ZOOM on Memory Sticks  
Press the PHOTO button to record the still image processed by PB ZOOM. (Images are  
recorded at 640 × 480 size.)  
In the PB ZOOM mode  
If you press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL button, the frame on the PB ZOOM screen  
disappears. You cannot move the part you pressed to the center of the screen.  
Edge of the enlarged image  
The edge of the enlarged image cannot be displayed at the center of the screen.  
To record an image proceeded on PB ZOOM on tapes  
Record an image following the procedure on page 162.  
165  
Pla yin g b a ck im a g e s in a co n t in u o u s lo o p  
SLIDE SHOW  
You can automatically play back images in sequence. This function is useful especially  
when checking recorded images or during a presentation.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make  
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(3) Press SLIDE SHOW.  
(4) Press START. Your camcorder plays back the images recorded on a Memory  
Stickin sequence.  
2
FN  
SLIDE SHOW  
1000001  
1 / 6  
1360  
4
1
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
LOCK  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
PAUSE  
+
END  
To st o p t h e slid e sh o w  
Press  
END.  
To p a u se d u rin g a slid e sh o w  
Press PAUSE.  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press  
END to return to PAGE3, then press EXIT.  
To st a rt t h e slid e sh o w fro m a p a rt icu la r im a g e  
Select the desired image using / + buttons before step 4.  
To view recorded images on TV  
Before operation connect your camcorder to a TV with the A/ V connecting cable  
supplied with your camcorder.  
If you change the Memory Stickduring operation  
The slide show does not operate. If you change the Memory Stick,be sure to follow  
the steps again from the beginning.  
166  
Pre ve n t in g a ccid e n t a l e ra su re  
Im a g e p ro t e ct io n  
You can protect selected images to prevent accidental erasure of important images.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.  
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press INDEX on your camcorder to display the index.  
(3) Press - MARK. The screen to protect the image appears.  
(4) Press the image you want to protect. The -appears on the protected  
image.  
2
INDEX  
-
MARK  
MARK  
DEL  
2
EXIT  
3
RET.  
-
-
MARK  
EXIT  
3
1
4
1
4
2
5
3,4  
5
6
6
-MARK  
T
1 / 40  
t
T
2 / 40  
t
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l im a g e p ro t e ct io n  
Press the image you want to cancel image protection in step 4 again. The -”  
disappears.  
Note  
Formatting erases all information on the Memory Stick,including the protected  
image data. Before formatting a Memory Stick, check its contents.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to LOCK  
You cannot protect images.  
167  
De le t in g im a g e s DELETE  
You can delete images stored in a Memory Stick.You can delete all images or only  
selected images.  
De le t in g se le ct e d im a g e s  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.  
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Play back the image you want to delete.  
(3) Press FN to display PAGE1.  
(4) Press DELETE. DELETE?appears on the LCD screen.  
(5) Press OK. The selected image is deleted.  
3
FN  
3 / 40  
DELETE  
1000003  
1360  
4
DELETE?  
DELE–  
TE  
OK  
CAN–  
CEL  
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a n im a g e  
Press CANCEL in step 5.  
Notes  
To delete a protected image, first cancel image protection.  
Once you delete an image, you cannot restore it. Before deleting an image, carefully  
check the image.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to LOCK  
You cannot delete images.  
168  
De le t in g im a g e s DELETE  
De le t in g se le ct e d im a g e s o n t h e in d e x scre e n  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make  
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press INDEX to display the index screen.  
(3) Press DEL. Then press the images you want to delete. The number of the  
selected image is highlighted.  
(4) Press EXEC. DELETE?appears on the LCD screen.  
(5) Press OK. The selected images are deleted.  
2
INDEX  
-
MARK  
MARK  
DEL  
2
EXIT  
3
RET.  
DEL  
-
EXEC  
2
EXIT  
3
1
4
1
4
3
5
6
5
6
DEL  
T
1 / 40  
t
T
3 / 40  
t
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a n im a g e  
Press CANCEL in step 5.  
169  
De le t in g im a g e s DELETE  
De le t in g a ll im a g e s  
You can delete all unprotected images in a Memory Stick.”  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make  
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select DELETE ALL in  
, then press the dial (p. 204).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select OK, then press the dial. OK changes  
to EXECUTE.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select EXECUTE, then press the dial.  
DELETING flashes on the screen. When all unprotected images are deleted,  
COMPLETE is displayed.  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
FILE NO.  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
2
3
4
FILE NO.  
DELETE ALL READY  
FORMAT  
DELETE ALL RETURN  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
OK  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
FILE NO.  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
FILE NO.  
DELETE ALL RETURN  
DELETE ALL RETURN  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
OK  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
EXECUTE  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
FILE NO.  
DELETE ALL DELETING  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
MEMORY SET  
STILL SET  
MOVIE SET  
FILE NO.  
DELETE ALL COMPLETE  
FORMAT  
RETURN  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
To ca n ce l d e le t in g a ll t h e im a g e s in t h e Me m o ry St ick”  
Select RETURN in step 3 or 4.  
While DELETING appears  
Do not turn the POWER switch or press any buttons.  
170  
Writ in g a p rin t m a rk PRINT MARK  
You can specify a recorded still image to print out by writing a print mark. This  
function is useful for printing out still images later.  
Your camcorder conforms to the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard for  
specifying still images to print out.  
Before operation  
Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only) or VCR.  
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press INDEX to display the index screen.  
(3) Press  
MARK. The screen to write a print mark appears.  
(4) Press the image you want to write a print mark. The “  
appears on the  
selected image.  
2
INDEX  
-
MARK  
MARK  
DEL  
2
EXIT  
3
RET.  
MARK  
EXIT  
3
1
4
1
4
2
5
3,4  
5
6
6
MARK  
T
1 / 40  
t
T
2 / 40  
t
To re t u rn t o FN  
Press EXIT.  
To ca n ce l w rit in g p rin t m a rks  
Press the image you want to cancel the print mark in step 4 again . The  
disappears.  
If the w rite-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to LOCK  
You cannot write print marks on still images.  
Moving pictures  
You cannot write print marks on moving pictures.  
171  
Usin g t h e o p t io n a l p rin t e r  
You can use the optional printer on your camcorder to print images on print paper.  
For details, refer to the operating instructions of the printer.  
There are various ways of printing still images. The following describes the setup for  
print by selecting  
in the menu settings and the set up for print setup by selecting  
9PIC PRINT on the touch panel on your camcorder.  
Before operation  
Insert a recorded Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
Attach the optional printer to your camcorder as illustrated.  
Printer  
FN  
MENU  
Se t t in g w it h t h e m e n u  
You can print DATE/ TIME on print paper.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make  
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press MENU, then turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select DATE/ TIME in  
, then press the dial (p. 205).  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode.  
DATE  
DAY & TIME  
:
4 12 00AM  
JUL 4 2002  
172  
Usin g t h e o p t io n a l p rin t e r  
Se t t in g w it h t h e t o u ch p a n e l  
You can make 9 stickers on a single sheet when you print images recorded on a  
Memory Stickin 9PIC PRINT.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only). Make  
sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press FN and select PAGE3.  
(3) Press 9PIC PRINT.  
(4) Press the desired mode.  
SAME PICS  
MULTI PICS or MARKED PICS*  
* Nine still images with print marks are printed together.  
Moving pictures recorded on Memory Stick”  
You cannot print moving pictures.  
When Memory Stickhas no files  
NO STILL IMAGE FILEappears on the screen.  
When there are no files w ith a PRINT MARK  
NO PRINT MARKappears on the screen.  
Images processed by 9PIC PRINT  
You cannot insert a DATE/ TIME indicator.  
Images recorded in the MULTI SCRN  
You cannot print images recorded in the multi screen mode on sticker type print paper.  
173  
Vie w in g Im a g e s Usin g yo u r Co m p u t e r —  
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r  
In t ro d u ct io n  
There are the following ways of connecting the camcorder to a computer in order to  
view images saved on a Memory Stickor recorded on tape on your computer.  
To view images on a computer which has a Memory Stick slot, first eject the Memory  
Stickfrom the camcorder and then insert it into the computers Memory Stick slot.  
Camcorder  
Connection jack  
Connection  
cable  
Computer environment  
requirements  
USB cable  
(supplied)  
USB connector,  
editing software  
USB jack  
DV jack  
Tape stills and  
movies  
i.LINK cable  
(DV connecting  
cable ) (optional)  
DV connector,  
editing software  
Memory Stick”  
stills and movies  
USB cable  
(supplied)  
USB connector,  
editing software  
USB jack  
When connecting to a computer via the USB jack, complete installation of the  
USB driver before connecting the camcorder to the computer. If you connect  
the camcorder to the computer first, you w ill not be able to install the USB  
driver correctly.  
For details about your computers connectors and editing software, contact the  
computer manufacturer.  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ja ck  
For more information, see page 177.  
(USB) jack  
USB connector  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
174  
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r In t ro d u ct io n  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e DV ja ck  
Your computer must have a DV connector and editing software installed that can read  
video signals.  
DV IN/ OUT  
DV connector  
is marked on this side  
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)  
: Signal flow  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ja ck  
There are two methods of USB connection, NORMAL and PTP. The default setting is  
NORMAL. Here we explain how to use the camcorder with a standard USB connection  
(NORMAL).  
See page 177 when using Windows and page 193 when using Macintosh.  
(USB) jack  
USB connector  
USB cable (supplied)  
You can also use a Memory Stick Reader/ Writer (optional).  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r w it h o u t a USB ja ck  
Use an optional floppy disk adaptor for Memory Stick or a PC card adaptor for Memory  
Stick.  
When purchasing an accessory, check its catalog beforehand for the recommended  
operating environment.  
175  
Vie w in g im a g e s o n yo u r co m p u t e r In t ro d u ct io n  
No t e s o n u sin g yo u r co m p u t e r  
Me m o ry St ick”  
• “Memory Stickoperations on your camcorder cannot be assured if a Memory Stick”  
formatted on your computer is used on your camcorder, or if the Memory Stickin  
your camcorder was formatted from your computer when the USB cable was  
connected.  
Do not compress the data on the Memory Stick.Compressed files cannot be played  
back on your camcorder.  
So ft w a re  
Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open a  
still image file.  
When you load an image modified using retouching software from your computer to  
your camcorder or when you directly modify the image on your camcorder, the image  
format will differ so a file error indicator may appear and you may be unable to open  
the file.  
Co m m u n ica t io n s w it h yo u r co m p u t e r  
Communications between your camcorder and your computer may not recover after  
recovering from Suspend, Resume, or Sleep.  
176  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r  
co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Complete installation of the USB driver before connecting the camcorder to  
the computer. If you connect the camcorder to the computer first, you w ill not  
be able to install the USB driver correctly.  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
You must install a USB driver onto your computer in order to connect the camcorder to  
the computers USB connector. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied,  
along with the application software required for viewing images.  
If you connect your camcorder and your computer using the USB cable, you can view  
pictures live from your camcorder and pictures recorded on a tape on your computer  
(USB streaming function).  
Furthermore, if you download pictures from your camcorder to your computer, you can  
process or edit them in image processing software and append them to e-mail.  
You can view images recorded on a Memory Stickon your computer.  
Re co m m e n d e d co m p u t e r u sa g e e n viro n m e n t w h e n co n n e ct in g  
via USB ca b le a n d vie w in g t a p e im a g e s o n t h e co m p u t e r  
OS:  
Microsoft Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP  
Home Edition or Windows XP Professional  
Standard installation is required.  
However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.  
You cannot hear sound if your computer is running Windows 98, but you can read still  
images.  
CPU:  
Minimum 500 MHz Intel Pentium III or faster (800 MHz or faster recommended)  
Application:  
DirectX 8.0a or later  
Sound system:  
16 bit stereo sound card and stereo speakers  
Memory:  
64 MB or more  
Hard disk:  
Available memory required for installation:  
at least 200MB  
Available hard disc memory recommended:  
at least 1GB (depending on the size of the image files edited)  
Display:  
4 MB VRAM video card, Minimum 800 × 600 dot Hi color (16 bit color, 65 000 colors),  
Direct Draw display driver capability (At 800 × 600 dot or less, 256 colors and less, this  
product will not operate correctly.)  
Others:  
This product is compatible with DirectX technology, so it is necessary to install DirectX.  
The USB connector must be provided as standard.  
You cannot use this function in the Macintosh environment.  
177  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Re co m m e n d e d co m p u t e r u sa g e e n viro n m e n t w h e n co n n e ct in g  
via USB ca b le a n d vie w in g Me m o ry St ickim a g e s o n t h e  
co m p u t e r  
OS:  
Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 98SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional,  
Windows XP Home Edition or Windows XP Professional  
Standard installation is required.  
However, operation is not assured if the above environment is an upgraded OS.  
CPU:  
MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster  
The USB connector must be provided as standard.  
Windows Media Player must be installed (to play back moving pictures).  
Notes  
Operations are not guaranteed for the Windows environment if you connect two or  
more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.  
Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is  
used simultaneously.  
Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments  
mentioned above.  
Windows and Windows Media are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/ or other countries.  
Pentium is trademark or registered trademark of Intel Corporation.  
All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, TMand “®” are not  
mentioned in each case in this manual.  
178  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r  
Start the follow ing operation w ithout connecting the USB cable to your  
computer.  
Connect the USB cable according to Making the computer recognize the  
camcorder.  
If you are using Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Home Edition/  
Professional, log in with permission of Administrators.  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer. The  
application software starts up and the title screen appears.  
(3) Move the cursor to USB Driver and click. This starts USB driver installation.  
(4) Follow the on-screen messages to install the USB driver.  
(5) Remove the CD-ROM and then restart the computer, in accordance with the  
instructions on the screen.  
Note  
If you connect the USB cable before USB driver installation is complete, the USB driver  
will not be properly registered. Carry out installation again in accordance with the steps  
on page 182.  
Window s XP Home Edition/Professional users  
If you go to USBCONNECT in the menu settings and select PTP, you can copy  
Memory Stickimages from the camcorder onto your computer without installing the  
USB driver. This is ideal for simply copying images from a camcorder onto a computer.  
Refer to page 207 for details.  
179  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Ma kin g t h e co m p u t e r re co g n ize t h e ca m co rd e r  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e  
Refer to page 181 for details on viewing Memory Stickimages on your computer.  
You need to install PIXELA ImageMixer to view images recorded on a tape on your  
computer. Install it from the CD-ROM supplied with your camcorder.  
To install and use this software in Windows 2000 Professional, you must be authorized  
as Power Users or Administrators. For Windows XP Home Edition/ Professional, you  
must be authorized as Administrators.  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
If you are using your computer, close all running applications.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive of your computer.  
The application software starts up and the title screen appears. If the title  
screen does not appear, double-click My Computerand then ImageMixer”  
(CD-ROM Drive). The application software screen appears after a while.  
(3) Move the cursor to PIXELA ImageMixerand click.  
The Install Wizard program starts up and the Select Settings Language”  
screen appears.  
(4) Select the language for installation.  
(5) Follow the on-screen messages.  
The installation screen disappears when installation is complete.  
(6) Click DirectX.  
Follow the on-screen messages to install DirectX.  
Restart your computer when the installation is completed.  
(7) Connect the AC power adaptor to your camcorder.  
(8) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(9) Select USB STREAM in  
to ON in the menu settings (p. 207).  
(10)With the CD-ROM inserted, connect the USB jacks of the camcorder and  
computer using the USB cable supplied with your camcorder.  
Your computer recognizes the camcorder, and the Windows Add Hardware  
Wizard starts.  
(USB) jack  
USB connector  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
180  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
(11)Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes  
that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts  
three times because three different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow  
the installation to complete without interrupting it.  
For Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition/ Professional users  
(12)After the File Neededscreen appears.  
Open Browse...t My Computert ImageMixert Sonyhcb.sys,  
and click OK.  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n Me m o ry St icks  
Before operation  
Set USBCONNECT in  
NORMAL.)  
to NORMAL in the menu settings. (The default setting is  
(1) Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
(2) Connect the AC power adaptor and set the POWER switch to MEMORY/  
NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only).  
(3) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB connector on your  
computer using the supplied USB cable.  
USB MODE appears on the LCD screen of your camcorder. Your computer  
recognizes the camcorder, and the Add Hardware Wizard starts.  
(USB) jack  
USB connector  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
(4) Follow the on-screen messages so that the Add Hardware Wizard recognizes  
that the USB drivers have been installed. The Add Hardware Wizard starts  
two times because two different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow the  
installation to complete without interrupting it.  
You cannot install the USB driver if a Memory Stickis not in your camcorder.  
Be sure to insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder before installing the USB  
driver.  
181  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
If yo u ca n n o t in st a ll t h e USB d rive r  
The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your  
camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Perform the following  
procedure to correctly install the USB driver.  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e  
Step 1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver  
1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
2 Connect the AC power adaptor, and set the POWER switch to VCR.  
3 Connect the USB connector on your computer to the (USB) jack on your  
camcorder using the USB cable supplied with your camcorder.  
4 Open your computers Device Manager.  
Window s XP Home Edition/Professional:  
Select Startt Control Panelt Systemt Hardware, and click the  
Device Managerbutton.  
If there is no Systeminside Pick a categoryafter clicking Control Panel,  
click Switch to classic viewinstead.  
Window s 2000 Professional:  
Select My Computert Control Panelt Systemt Hardwaretab,  
and click the Device Managerbutton.  
Window s 98SE/Window s Me:  
Select My Computert Control Panelt System, and click Device  
Manager.  
182  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
5 Select and delete the underlined devices below.  
Window s 98SE  
Window s Me  
Window s 2000 Professional  
Window s XP Home Edition/Professional  
183  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
6 Turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, and then  
disconnect the USB cable.  
7 Restart your computer.  
Step 2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM  
Perform the entire procedure described in Installing the USB driveron page 179.  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St ick”  
Step1: Uninstall the incorrect USB driver  
1 Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
2 Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder.  
3 Connect the AC power adaptor, and set the POWER switch to MEMORY/  
NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only).  
4 Connect the USB connector on your computer to the (USB) jack on your  
camcorder using the USB cable supplied with your camcorder.  
5 Open your computers Device Manager.  
Window s 2000 Professional:  
Select My Computert Control Panelt Systemt Hardware, and  
click the Device Managerbutton.  
Other OS:  
Select My Computert Control Panelt System, and click Device  
Manager.  
6 Select Other devices.  
Select the device prefixed with the ?mark and delete.  
Ex: (?)Sony Handycam  
7 Turn the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) on your camcorder, and then  
disconnect the USB cable.  
8 Restart your computer.  
Step2: Install the USB driver on the supplied CD-ROM  
Perform the entire procedure described in Installing the USB driveron page 179.  
184  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n  
yo u r co m p u t e r Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s w it h PIXELA Im a g e Mixe r Ve r.1.0 fo r So n y”  
You need to install the USB driver and PIXELA ImageMixer to view images recorded  
on a tape on your computer (p. 179).  
To install and use the software in Windows 2000 Professional, you must be authorized  
as Power Users or Administrators. For Windows XP Home Edition/ Professional, you  
must be authorized as Administrators.  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Connect the AC power adaptor, and insert a cassette into your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
Select USB STREAM in  
to ON in the menu settings (p. 207).  
(4) Select Startt Programst PIXELAt ImageMixert PIXELA  
ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony.  
(5) Click  
on the screen.  
The PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sonystartup screen appears on your  
computer. The title screen appears.  
185  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n yo u r co m p u t e r  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
(6) Select  
.
Preview window  
(7) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB connector on your  
computer using the supplied USB cable.  
(USB) jack  
USB connector  
Push into the end  
USB cable (supplied)  
(8) Press N to start playback.  
The picture from the tape appears on preview window on your computer.  
186  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n yo u r co m p u t e r  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Vie w in g p ict u re s live fro m yo u r ca m co rd e r  
(1) Follow the steps 1, 2 on page 185.  
(2) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
Select USB STREAM in  
to ON in the menu settings (p. 207).  
(3) Follow the steps 4 to 7 on pages 185, 186.  
The picture from your camcorder appears on preview window on your  
computer.  
Ca p t u rin g st ill im a g e s  
Preview window  
Thumbnail list widow  
(1) Select  
.
(2) Looking at the preview window, move the cursor to  
point you want to capture.  
and press it at the  
The still image on the screen is captured.  
Captured images are displayed in the thumbnail list window.  
187  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n yo u r co m p u t e r  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Ca p t u rin g m o vin g p ict u re s  
Preview window  
Thumbnail list widow  
(1) Select  
(2) Look at the preview window and click on  
you want to capture. changes to  
(3) Look at the preview window and click on  
.
at the first scene of the movie  
at the last scene you want to  
.
capture. The captured images appear in the thumbnail list window.  
Notes  
The following may occur while using your camcorder, and are not due to any  
malfunction.  
The image shakes up and down.  
Some images are not displayed correctly due to noise, etc.  
Images of different color systems to that of the camcorder are not displayed correctly.  
When your camcorder is in the standby with a cassette inserted, it turns off  
automatically after five minutes.  
We recommend setting DEMO MODE to OFF in the menu settings when your  
camcorder is in the standby, and no cassette is inserted.  
Indicators in the camcorder LCD screen do not appear on images that are captured into  
your computer.  
188  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a t a p e o n yo u r co m p u t e r  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
If image data cannot be transferred by the USB connection  
The USB driver has been registered incorrectly as your computer was connected to your  
camcorder before installation of the USB driver was completed. Reinstall the USB driver  
following the procedure on page 182.  
If any trouble occurs  
Close all running applications, then restart your computer.  
Carry out the follow ing operations after quitting the application:  
Disconnect the USB cable.  
Change the POWER switch to the other position or set the POWER switch to OFF  
(CHG) on your camcorder.  
Se e in g t h e o n -lin e h e lp (o p e ra t in g in st ru ct io n s) o f PIXELA  
Im a g e Mixe r Ve r.1.0 fo r So n y”  
A PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sonyon-line help site is available where you can  
find the detailed operating method of PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony.  
(1) Click  
located in the upper-right corner of the screen.  
The ImageMixers Manual screen appears.  
(2) You can find the information you need from the list of contents.  
To close on-line help  
Click  
at the top right of the screen.  
If you have any questions about PIXELA ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sony”  
ImageMixer Ver.1.0 for Sonyis a trademark of PIXELA corporation. For more  
information, refer to the instruction manual of the CD-ROM supplied with your  
camcorder.  
No t e o n u sin g yo u r co m p u t e r  
Co m m u n ica t io n s w it h yo u r co m p u t e r  
Communications between your camcorder and your computer may not recover after  
recovering from Suspend, Resume, or Sleep.  
189  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry  
St icko n yo u r co m p u t e r  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Vie w in g im a g e s  
Before operation  
You need to install the USB driver to view Memory Stickimages on your computer.  
(p. 179)  
An application such as Windows Media Player must be installed to play back moving  
pictures in Windows environment.  
Set USBCONNECT in  
to NORMAL in the menu settings. (The default setting is  
NORMAL.)  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Windows to load.  
(2) Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder, and connect the AC power  
adaptor to your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only).  
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB connector on your  
computer using the supplied USB cable.  
USB MODE appears on the LCD screen of your camcorder.  
(USB) jack  
USB connector  
USB cable (supplied)  
(5) Open My Computeron Windows and double-click the newly recognized  
drive (Example: Removable Disk (E:)).  
The folders inside the Memory Stickare displayed.  
190  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St icko n yo u r co m p u t e r  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
(6) Select and double-click the desired image file from the folder.  
For the detailed folder and file name, see Image file storage destinations and  
image files.  
Desired file type  
Still image  
Double-click in this order  
Dcimfolder t 100msdcffolder  
Mssonyfolder t Moml0001folder t Image file*  
t
Image file  
Moving picture*  
* Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is recommended. If  
you play back the file directly from the Memory Stick,the image and sound may  
break off.  
Im a g e file st o ra g e d e st in a t io n s a n d im a g e file s  
Image files recorded with your camcorder are grouped in folders by recording mode.  
The meanings of the file names are as follows. ssss stands for any number within  
the range from 0001 to 9999.  
Fo r Win d o w s Me u se rs  
(Th e d rive re co g n izin g yo u r ca m co rd e r is [E:].)  
Folder containing still image data  
Folder containing moving picture data  
Folder  
File  
Meaning  
100MSDCF  
MOML0001  
DSC0ssss.JPG  
MOV0ssss.MPG  
Still image file  
Moving picture file  
191  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry St icko n yo u r co m p u t e r  
Fo r Win d o w s u se rs  
Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d e je ct t h e Me m o ry St icko r se t  
t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF(CHG).  
For Window s 2000 Professional/Me, Window s XP Home Edition/Professional  
users  
To unplug the USB cable, eject the Memory Stickor set the POWER switch to OFF  
(CHG) follow the procedure below.  
(1) Move the cursor to the Unplug or Eject Hardwareicon on the Task Tray and  
click to cancel the applicable drive.  
(2) After the Safe to removemessage appears, disconnect the USB cable and  
eject the Memory Stickor set the POWER switch to OFF(CHG).  
192  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r  
co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs  
Wh e n co n n e ct in g t o a co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
You must install a USB driver onto your computer in order to connect the camcorder to  
the computers USB connector. The USB driver can be found on the CD-ROM supplied,  
along with the application software required for viewing images.  
Re co m m e n d e d co m p u t e r u sa g e e n viro n m e n t w h e n co n n e ct in g  
via USB ca b le a n d vie w in g Me m o ry St ickim a g e s o n t h e  
co m p u t e r  
Mac OS 8.5.1/ 8.6/ 9.0/ 9.1/ 9.2 or Mac OS X (v10.0/ v10.1)  
Standard installation is required.  
However, note that the upgrade to Mac OS 9.0/ 9.1 should be used for the following  
models.  
iMac with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation and a slot loading type CD-ROM drive  
iBook or Power Mac G4 with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation  
The USB connector must be provided as standard.  
QuickTime 3.0 or newer must be installed (to play back moving pictures).  
Notes  
Operations are not guaranteed for the Macintosh environment if you connect two or  
more USB equipment to a single computer at the same time, or when using a hub.  
Some equipment may not operate depending on the type of USB equipment that is  
used simultaneously.  
Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments  
mentioned above.  
Macintosh and Mac OS, QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Computer Inc.  
All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, TMand “®” are not  
mentioned in each case in this manual.  
193  
Co n n e ct in g yo u r ca m co rd e r t o yo u r co m p u t e r u sin g t h e USB ca b le  
Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs  
In st a llin g t h e USB d rive r  
Do not connect the USB cable to your computer before installation of the USB  
driver is completed.  
For Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 users  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow the Mac OS to load.  
(2) Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your computer.  
The application software screen appears.  
(3) Click the USB Driverto open the folder containing the six files related to  
Driver.”  
(4) Select the following two files, and drag and drop them into the System Folder.  
Sony Camcorder USB Driver  
Sony Camcorder USB Shim  
(5) When the message appears, click OK.”  
The USB driver is installed on your computer.  
(6) Remove the CD-ROM from the computer.  
(7) Restart your computer.  
For Mac OS 9.1/9.2/Mac OS X (v10.0/v10.1)  
The USB driver need not be installed. Your Mac is automatically recognized as a drive  
just by connecting your Mac using the USB cable.  
194  
Vie w in g im a g e s re co rd e d o n a Me m o ry  
St icko n yo u r co m p u t e r  
Fo r Ma cin t o sh u se rs  
Vie w in g im a g e s  
Before operation  
You need to install the USB driver to view Memory Stickimages on your computer.  
(p. 194)  
QuickTime 3.0 or newer must be installed to play back moving pictures.  
(1) Turn on your computer and allow Mac OS to load.  
(2) Insert a Memory Stickinto your camcorder, and connect the AC power  
adaptor to your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only).  
(4) Connect the (USB) jack on your camcorder with the USB connector on your  
computer using the supplied USB cable.  
USB MODE appears on the LCD screen of your camcorder.  
(5) Double-click the Memory Stickicon on the desktop.  
The folders inside the Memory Stickare displayed.  
(6) Select and double-click the desired image file from the folder.  
Desired file type  
Still image  
Double-click in this order  
Dcimfolder t 100msdcffolder  
Mssonyfolder t Moml0001folder t Image file*  
t
Image file  
Moving picture*  
* Copying a file to the hard disk of your computer before viewing it is recommended. If  
you play back the file directly from the Memory Stick,the image and sound may  
break off.  
Disco n n e ct t h e USB ca b le a n d e je ct t h e Me m o ry St icko r se t  
t h e POWER sw it ch t o OFF(CHG)  
Follow the procedure below.  
(1) Close all running applications.  
Make sure that the access lamp of your camcorder is not lit.  
(2) Drag the Memory Stickicon into the Trash. Alternatively, select the  
Memory Stickicon by clicking on it, and then select Eject diskfrom the  
Specialmenu at the top left of the screen.  
(3) Disconnect the USB cable and eject the Memory Stickor the POWER switch  
to OFF (CHG).  
For Mac OS X (v10.0) users  
Shut down your computer, then disconnect the USB cable and eject the Memory Stick”  
or the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
195  
Ca p t u rin g im a g e s fro m a n a n a lo g vid e o u n it  
o n yo u r co m p u t e r Sig n a l co n ve rt fu n ct io n  
You can capture images and sound from an analog video unit connected to your  
computer which has the i.LINK (DV) jack connected to your camcorder.  
Before operation  
Set DISPLAY in  
to LCD in the menu settings. (The default setting is LCD.)  
(1) Set the POWER switch to VCR.  
(2) Press MENU, then select A/ V t DV OUT in  
EXEC dial (p. 202).  
to ON with the SEL/ PUSH  
(3) Start playback on the analog video unit.  
(4) Start procedures for capturing images and sound on your computer. The  
operation procedures depend on your computer and the software you are  
using.  
For details on how to capture images, refer to the instruction manual of your  
computer and software you are using.  
AUDIO/VIDEO  
DV IN/OUT  
VCR  
OUT  
Yellow  
Red  
i.LINK  
White  
S VIDEO  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
A/ Vconnecting cable (supplied)  
: Signal flow  
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable) (optional)  
Aft e r ca p t u rin g im a g e s a n d so u n d  
Stop capturing procedures on your computer , and stop the playback on the analog  
video unit.  
Notes  
You need to install software that supports the exchange video signals.  
Depending on the state of the video signals, the computer may not be able to output  
the images correctly when you convert video signals into digital video signals via  
your camcorder.  
You cannot record or capture the video output via your camcorder when the video  
tapes include copyright protection signals such as the ID-2 system.  
You can capture images and sound with an S video cable (optional) instead of the  
A/ V connecting cable (supplied).  
If your computer has a USB connector  
You can connect using a USB cable, but images may not be transfered smoothly.  
196  
Usin g t h e Ne t w o rk fu n ct io n —  
Acce ssin g t h e n e t w o rk  
DCR-TRV50 o n ly  
You can access the Internet using a Bluetooth equipped device that is complied to the  
camcorder. Once the access is made, you can view a Web page, send/ receive your  
e-mail, etc. This section describes only how to open the Network Menu.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK.  
Make sure that the LOCK switch is set to the left (unlock) position.  
(2) Press NETWORK.  
(Bluetooth) lamp lights up and Network Menu appears.  
For the details, refer to the Network Function Operating Instructions supplied with  
your camcorder.  
(Bluetooth) lamp  
1
VCR  
OFF(CHG)  
CAMERA  
LOCK  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
NETWORK  
197  
Acce ssin g t h e n e t w o rk  
Ho w t o h o ld yo u r ca m co rd e r w h e n o p e ra t in g in NETWORK m o d e  
Hold your camcorder with your hand through the grip belt to keep from dropping it.  
The operation buttons needed in NETWORK mode are displayed on the LCD screen.  
Press the buttons with the stylus supplied.  
Aft e r u sin g t h e st ylu s  
Put it back in the holder. Hold the stylus correctly as shown in the illustration and insert  
it until it clicks.  
On trademarks  
The BLUETOOTH trademarks are owned by their proprietor and used by Sony  
Corporation under license.  
All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered  
trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, TMand “®” are not  
mentioned in each case in this manual.  
Note  
Make sure that your camcorder is in the standby with the POWER switch set to  
MEMORY/ NETWORK.  
During using the netw ork function  
You cannot use the optional printer.  
198  
Cu st o m izin g Yo u r Ca m co rd e r —  
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e  
m e n u  
To change the mode settings in the menu settings, select the menu items with the SEL/  
PUSH EXEC dial. The default settings can be partially changed. First, select the icon,  
then the menu item and then the mode.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to CAMERA, VCR or MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-  
TRV50 only), press MENU.  
(2) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired icon, then press the dial to  
set.  
(3) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired item, then press the dial to  
set.  
(4) Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select the desired mode, then press the dial  
to set.  
(5) If you want to change other items, select  
RETURN and press the dial, then  
repeat steps 2 to 4.  
For details, see Selecting the mode setting of each item(p. 200).  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
AUDIO MODE  
REMAIN  
TAPE SET  
CAMERA  
MANUAL SET  
EFFECT  
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
N. S. LIGHT  
AUTO SHTR  
1
REC MODE  
AUDIO MODE  
REMAIN  
SP  
2
3
4
P
RETURN  
MENU  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
r  
VCR  
MANUAL SET  
EFFECT  
P
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
AUDIO MODE  
REMAIN  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
AUDIO MODE  
REMAIN  
RETURN  
AUTO  
AUTO  
ON  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
MEMORY/NETWORK*  
MANUAL SET  
FLASH LVL  
WHT BAL  
N. S. LIGHT  
r  
[
] :  
MENU END  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
AUDIO MODE  
REMAIN  
TAPE SET  
REC MODE  
AUDIO MODE  
REMAIN  
RETURN  
AUTO  
ON  
ON  
RETURN  
[
] :  
MENU END  
[
] :  
MENU END  
* DCR-TRV50 only  
(continued on the following page)  
199  
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u  
To m a ke t h e m e n u d isp la y d isa p p e a r  
Press MENU.  
Menu items are displayed as the follow ing icons:  
MANUAL SET  
CAMERA SET  
VCR SET  
LCD/ VF SET  
MEMORY SET  
PRINT SET  
CM SET  
TAPE SET  
SETUP MENU  
OTHERS  
Se le ct in g t h e m o d e se t t in g o f e a ch it e m z is the default setting.  
Menu items differ depending on the position of the POWER switch. The screen shows  
only the items you can operate at the moment.  
The POWER switch is the name of the switch on the DCR-TRV50. It is referred to as  
MEMORY on the DCR-TRV40.  
POWER  
Icon/item  
MANUAL SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
sw itch  
P EFFECT  
——  
To add special effects like those in films or on  
the TV to images (p. 60, 75)  
VCR  
CAMERA  
FLASH LVL  
HIGH  
z NORMAL  
LOW  
Makes the flash level higher than normal.  
Normal setting  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
Makes the flash level lower than normal.  
To adjust the white balance (p. 54)  
WHT BAL  
N.S. LIGHT  
——  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
z ON  
To use the NightShot Light (p. 35)  
To cancel the NightShot Light  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
OFF  
AUTO SHTR z ON  
To automatically activate the electronic shutter  
when shooting in bright conditions  
CAMERA  
OFF  
To not automatically activate the electronic  
shutter even when shooting in bright conditions  
Note on FLASH LVL  
You cannot adjust FLASH LVL if the external flash (optional) is not compatible with the  
flash level.  
200  
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
CAMERA SET  
D ZOOM  
Mode  
Meaning  
z OFF  
20×  
To deactivate the digital zoom. Up to 10× zoom  
is performed.  
CAMERA  
To activate the digital zoom. More than 10× to  
20× zoom is performed digitally (p. 31)  
120×  
To activate the digital zoom. More than 10× to  
120× zoom is performed digitally  
PHOTO REC z MEMORY  
To record still images on Memory Sticks when CAMERA  
you press PHOTO in the tape recording or tape  
recording standby (p. 47)  
TAPE  
To record still images on tape when you press  
PHOTO in the tape recording or tape recording  
standby (p. 52)  
16:9WIDE  
z OFF  
——  
CAMERA  
CAMERA  
ON  
To record a 16:9 wide picture (p. 55)  
To compensate for camera-shake  
STEADYSHOT z ON  
OFF  
To cancel the SteadyShot. Natural pictures are  
produced when shooting a stationary object  
with a tripod.  
FRAME REC  
INT. REC  
z OFF  
ON  
To deactivate Frame recording  
To activate Frame recording (p. 74)  
To activate interval recording (p. 72)  
To deactivate interval recording  
CAMERA  
CAMERA  
ON  
z OFF  
SET  
To set the INTERVAL and REC TIME for  
interval recording  
HOLOGRAM F z AUTO  
The HOLOGRAM AF emits when focusing on  
subjects is difficult in dark places (p. 132)  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
OFF  
The HOLOGRAM AF does not emit.  
Notes on the SteadyShot  
The SteadyShot will not correct excessive camera-shake.  
Attachment of a conversion lens (optional) may influence the SteadyShot.  
If you cancel the SteadyShot  
The SteadyShot off indicator  
appears. Your camcorder prevents excessive  
compensation for camera-shake.  
(continued on the following page)  
201  
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
VCR SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
HiFi SOUND z STEREO  
To play back a stereo tape or dual sound track  
tape with main and sub sound (p. 221)  
VCR  
1
2
To play back a stereo tape with the left sound or  
a dual sound tape with main sound  
To play back a stereo tape with the right sound  
or a dual sound track tape with sub sound  
AUDIO MIX  
——  
To adjust the balance between the stereo 1 and  
stereo 2 (p. 109)  
VCR  
VCR  
ST1  
ST2  
A/VtDV OUT z OFF  
To output digital images and sound in analog  
format using your camcorder  
ON  
To output analog images and sound in digital  
format using your camcorder (p. 196)  
LCD/VF SET  
LCD B.L.  
z BRT NORMAL To set the brightness on the LCD screen to  
VCR  
normal  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
BRIGHT  
To brighten the LCD screen  
LCD COLOR  
——  
To adjust the color on the LCD screen, turn the  
SEL/ PUSH EXE dial.  
VCR  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
To get low-  
intensity  
To get high-  
intensity  
VF B.L.  
z BRT NORMAL To set the brightness on the viewfinder screen to VCR  
normal  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
BRIGHT  
To brighten the viewfinder screen  
Notes on LCD B.L. and VF B.L.  
When you select BRIGHT, battery life is reduced by about 10 percent during  
recording.  
When you use power supplies other than the battery pack, BRIGHT is automatically  
selected.  
Even if you adjust LCD B.L., LCD COLOR and/or VF B.L.  
The recorded picture will not be affected.  
202  
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
MEMORY SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
STILL SET  
BURST  
z OFF  
To not record continuously.  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
NORMAL  
To record from three to nine images  
continuously (p. 128)  
HIGH SPEED  
EXP BRKTG  
To record up to 16 images continuously fast  
To record three images continuously with  
different exposure  
MULTI SCRN To record nine images continuously, display the  
images on a single page divided into nine boxes  
z SUPER FINE  
To record still images in the finest image quality VCR  
QUALITY  
mode (p. 122)  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
FINE  
To record still images in the fine image quality  
mode  
STANDARD  
To record still images in the standard image  
quality mode  
IMAGESIZE z 1360 × 1020  
To record still images at 1360 × 1020 size  
(p. 124)  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
640 × 480  
To record still images at 640 × 480 size  
MOVIE SET  
z 320 × 240  
To record moving pictures at 320 × 240 size  
VCR  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
IMAGESIZE  
(p. 124).  
160 × 112  
To record moving pictures at 160 × 112 size.  
REMAIN z AUTO  
To display the remaining capacity of the  
Memory Stickin the following cases:  
For five seconds after setting the POWER  
switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-  
TRV50 only) or VCR  
VCR  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
For five seconds after setting the POWER  
switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-  
TRV50 only) or VCR and inserting a Memory  
Stick”  
When the remaining capacity of the Memory  
Stickis less than two minutes after setting the  
POWER switch to MEMORY/ NETWORK  
(DCR-TRV50 only)  
For five seconds from the start of moving  
picture recording  
For five seconds after completing a moving  
picture recording  
ON  
To always display the remaining capacity of the  
Memory Stick”  
(continued on the following page)  
203  
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
MEMORY SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
——  
z SERIES  
RESET  
——  
To copy still images on tape onto Memory  
Stick(p. 154).  
VCR  
PHOTO SAVE  
To assign numbers to file in sequence even if the VCR  
Memory Stickis changed  
FILE NO.  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
To reset the file numbering each time the  
Memory Stickis changed  
DELETE ALL  
FORMAT  
To delete all unprotected images (p. 170)  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
z RETURN  
To cancel formatting  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
OK  
To format an inserted Memory Stick”  
Formatting erases all information on the  
Memory Stick”  
Check the contents of the Memory Stick”  
before formatting.  
1. Select FORMAT.  
2. Select OK with the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial,  
then press the dial.  
3. After EXECUTE appears, press SEL/ PUSH  
EXEC dial. FORMATTING flashes during  
formatting. COMPLETE appears when  
formatting is finished.  
Notes on formatting  
Do not do any of the following while FORMATTING is displayed:  
Switch the POWER switch  
Operate buttons  
Eject the Memory Stick”  
The supplied or optional Memory Stickhas been formatted at factory. Formatting  
Memory Sticks on your camcorder is not required.  
You cannot format the Memory Stickif the write-protect tab on the Memory Stick”  
is set to LOCK.  
Format the Memory Stickwhen  
FORMAT ERROR is displayed.  
Formatting erases protected image data on the Memory Stick.”  
204  
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
PRINT SET  
DATE/TIME  
Mode  
Meaning  
z OFF  
To make prints without the recording date and  
time  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
DATE  
To make prints with the recording date (p. 172)  
To make prints with the recording date and time  
DAY&TIME  
CM SET  
TITLE  
——  
——  
To superimpose a title or make your own title  
(p. 110, 113)  
VCR  
CAMERA  
TITLEERASE  
TITLE DSPL  
To erase the title you have superimposed  
(p. 112)  
VCR  
CAMERA  
z ON  
OFF  
To display the title you have superimposed  
To not display the title  
VCR  
VCR  
CM SEARCH z ON  
To search using cassette memory (p. 80, 81, 83)  
To search without using cassette memory  
To label a cassette (p. 115)  
OFF  
TAPE TITLE  
ERASE ALL  
——  
VCR  
CAMERA  
——  
To erase all the data in cassette memory (p. 116)  
VCR  
CAMERA  
Note on PRINT SET  
DATE/ TIME is displayed only when an external printer (optional) is connected to the  
intelligent accessory shoe.  
(continued on the following page)  
205  
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
TAPE SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
z SP  
To record in the SP (Standard Play) mode  
VCR  
REC MODE  
CAMERA  
LP  
To increase the recording time to 1.5 times the  
SP mode  
z 12BIT  
To record in the 12-bit mode (two stereo sounds)  
VCR  
CAMERA  
AUDIO MODE  
qREMAIN  
16BIT  
To record in the 16-bit mode (one stereo sound  
with high quality)  
z AUTO  
To display the remaining tape bar:  
For about eight seconds after a cassette is  
inserted and your camcorder calculates the  
remaining amount of tape  
VCR  
CAMERA  
For about eight seconds after N or  
DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL is pressed  
ON  
To always display the remaining tape indicator  
Notes on the LP mode  
When you record a tape in the LP mode on your camcorder, we recommend playing  
the tape on your camcorder. When you play back the tape on other camcorders or  
VCRs, noise may occur in pictures or sound.  
When you record in the LP mode, we recommend using a Sony Excellence/ Master  
cassette so that you can get the most out of your camcorder.  
You cannot dub audio on a tape recorded in the LP mode. Use the SP mode for the  
tape to be audio dubbed.  
When you record in the SP and LP modes on one tape or you record some scenes in  
the LP mode, the playback picture may be distorted or the time code may not be  
written properly between scenes.  
Notes on AUDIO MODE  
You cannot dub audio on a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode.  
When playing back a tape recorded in the 16-bit mode, you cannot adjust the balance  
in AUDIO MIX.  
206  
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
SETUP MENU  
CLOCK SET  
Mode  
Meaning  
——  
To set the date or time (p. 20).  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
USB STREAM z OFF  
ON  
To deactivate the USB streaming  
To activate the USB streaming  
VCR  
CAMERA  
USBCONNECT z NORMAL  
To connect and recognize the Memory Stick”  
drive.  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
PTP  
To connect and only copy a Memory Stick”  
image from your camcorder to a computer (only  
with Windows XP or Mac OS X)  
1
Turn the SEL/ PUSH EXEC dial to select  
USBCONNECT followed by PTP, then press  
the dial to set.  
2
Insert the Memory Stickin the camcorder,  
and connect the camcorder to the computer  
using a USB cable. Copy Wizard will  
automatically start up.  
LTR SIZE  
z NORMAL  
To display selected menu items in normal size  
VCR  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
2×  
To display selected menu items at twice the  
normal size  
LANGUAGE  
z ENGLISH  
To display the following information indicators  
in English: min, REC, STBY and START.  
VCR  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
FRANÇAIS  
To display the information indicators in French.  
ESPAÑOL  
To display the information indicators in  
Spanish.  
PORTUGUÊS To display the information indicators in  
Portuguese.  
To display the information indicators in  
Chinese.  
To display the information indicators in Korean.  
z ON  
DEMO MODE  
To make the demonstration appear  
To cancel the demonstration  
CAMERA  
OFF  
Notes on DEMO MODE  
You cannot select DEMO MODE when a cassette or a Memory Stickis inserted in  
your camcorder.  
When NIGHTSHOT is set to ON, the NIGHTSHOTindicator appears on the screen  
and you cannot select DEMO MODE in the menu settings.  
The DEMO MODE default setting is STBY (Standby) and the demonstration starts  
about 10 minutes after you have set the POWER switch to CAMERA without a  
cassette and a Memory Stickinserted.  
To cancel the demonstration, insert a cassette or a Memory Stick,set the POWER  
switch to other than CAMERA, or set DEMO MODE to OFF. To set to STBY (Standby)  
again, leave the DEMO MODE at ON in the menu settings, turn the POWER switch to  
OFF (CHG), and return the POWER switch to CAMERA.  
(continued on the following page)  
207  
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
OTHERS  
Mode  
Meaning  
DATA CODE*1  
z DATE/ CAM  
To display date, time and various settings  
during playback when pressing DATA CODE  
on the Remote Commander (p. 42)  
VCR  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
DATE  
To display date and time during playback when  
pressing DATA CODE on the Remote  
Commander  
AREA SET  
DST SET*2  
——  
Temporarily change the area where you are  
using your camcorder  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
z OFF  
Not during daylight saving time  
During daylight saving time  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
ON  
BEEP  
z MELODY  
To output the melody when you start/ stop  
recording or when an unusual condition occurs  
on your camcorder  
VCR  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
NORMAL  
OFF  
To output the beep instead of the melody  
To cancel all sound including shutter sound  
COMMANDER  
z ON  
To activate the Remote Commander supplied  
with your camcorder  
VCR  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
OFF  
To deactivate the Remote Commander to avoid  
erroneous remote control operation caused by  
other VCRs remote control  
1
* When using the Remote Commander.  
2
* Instead of DST, SUMMERTIME is displayed on the screen for some models.  
208  
Ch a n g in g t h e d e fa u lt se t t in g s w it h t h e m e n u  
POWER  
sw itch  
Icon/item  
OTHERS  
DISPLAY  
Mode  
Meaning  
z LCD  
To show the display on the LCD screen and in  
the viewfinder  
VCR  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
V-OUT/ LCD  
To show the display on the TV screen, LCD  
screen and in the viewfinder  
REC LAMP  
z ON  
To light up the camera recording lamp at the  
front of your camcorder  
CAMERA  
MEMORY/  
NETWORK  
OFF  
To turn the camera recording lamp off so that  
the person is not aware of the recording  
VIDEO EDIT  
z RETURN  
To cancel video editing.  
VCR  
TAPE  
To make a program and perform video editing  
(p. 89)  
MEMORY  
To make program and perform MPEG editing  
(p. 151)  
Note  
If you press DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL with DISPLAY set to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu  
settings, the picture from a TV or VCR will not appear on the LCD screen even when  
your camcorder is connected to outputs on the TV or VCR.  
When recording a close subject  
When REC LAMP is set to ON, the red camera recording lamp on the front of the  
camcorder may reflect on the subject if it is close. In this case, we recommend that you  
set REC LAMP to OFF.  
In more than five minutes after removing the pow er supply  
The WHT BAL, FLASH LVL, HiFi SOUND, AUDIO MIX and COMMANDER settings  
are returned to their default settings.  
Other menu settings are held in memory even when the battery is removed.  
209  
Tro u b le sh o o t in g —  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct  
t ro u b le  
If you run into any problem using your camcorder, use the following table to  
troubleshoot the problem. If the problem persists, disconnect the power supply and  
contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If C:ss:ss”  
appears on the screen, the self-diagnosis display function has worked. See page 217.  
In t h e re co rd in g  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The POWER switch is not set to CAMERA.  
c Set it to CAMERA (p. 26).  
START/ STOP does not operate.  
The tape has run out.  
c Rewind the cassette or insert a new one (p. 23, 44).  
The write-protect tab is set to expose the red mark.  
c Use a new cassette or slide the tab (p. 23).  
The tape is stuck to the drum (moisture condensation).  
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at  
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 228).  
While being operated when the POWER switch is set to  
CAMERA, your camcorder has been in the standby for  
more than five minutes.  
The power goes off.  
c Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG) and then to  
CAMERA.  
The battery pack is dead or nearly dead.  
c Install a charged battery pack.  
PHOTO REC is set to TAPE in the menu settings.  
c Set it to MEMORY (p. 201).  
You cannot record still images on a  
Memory Stickin the tape recording  
or tape recording standby.  
PHOTO REC is set to MEMORY in the menu settings.  
c Set it to TAPE (p. 201).  
You cannot record still images on a  
tape.  
The viewfinder lens is not adjusted.  
c Adjust the viewfinder lens (p. 30).  
The image on the viewfinder screen  
is not clear.  
STEADYSHOT is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
The SteadyShot does not work.  
c Set it to ON (p. 201).  
The setting is the manual focus.  
The autofocusing does not work.  
c Set FOCUS to the autofocus (p. 69).  
Shooting conditions are not suitable for autofocus.  
c Adjust for manual focusing (p. 69).  
210  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The picture does not appear in the  
viewfinder.  
The LCD panel is open.  
c Close the LCD panel (p. 28).  
A vertical band appears when you  
shoot a subject such as lights or a  
candle flame against a dark  
background.  
The contrast between the subject and background is too  
high. This is not a malfunction.  
A vertical band appears when you  
shoot a very bright subject.  
This is not a malfunction.  
Some tiny white, red, blue or green  
spots appear on the screen.  
Slow shutter, Super NightShot or Color Slow Shutter is  
activated. This is not a malfunction.  
An unknown picture is displayed on  
the screen.  
If 10 minutes elapse after you set the POWER switch to  
CAMERA or DEMO MODE is set to ON in the menu  
settings without a cassette and a Memory Stickinserted,  
your camcorder automatically starts the demonstration.  
c Insert a cassette or a Memory Stickand the  
demonstration stops.  
You can also cancel DEMO MODE (p. 207).  
The picture is recorded in incorrect or NIGHTSHOT is set to ON.  
unnatural colors.  
c Set it to OFF (p. 34).  
The picture appears too bright, and  
the subject does not appear on the  
screen.  
NIGHTSHOT is set to ON in a bright place.  
c Set it to OFF (p. 34).  
The backlight is active.  
c Set it off (p. 34).  
The click of the shutter does not  
sound.  
BEEP is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to MELODY or NORMAL (p. 208).  
Black bands appear when you  
record TV or computer screen.  
Set the STEADYSHOT in the menu settings to OFF  
(p. 201).  
An external flash (optional) does not  
work.  
The power of the external flash is off or the power supply  
is not installed.  
c Turn on the external flash or install the power supply.  
Two or more external flashes (optional) are attached.  
c Only one external flash (optional) can be attached.  
(continued on the following page)  
211  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
In t h e p la yb a ck  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The POWER switch is not set to VCR.  
c Set it to VCR (p. 40).  
The tape does not move when a  
video control button is pressed.  
The cassette has run out of tape.  
The playback button does not work.  
c Rewind the tape (p. 40).  
The video heads may be dirty.  
c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (optional)  
(p. 229).  
There are horizontal lines on the  
picture, or the playback picture is not  
clear or does not appear.  
The stereo tape is played back with HiFi SOUND set to 2  
in the menu settings.  
No sound or only a low sound is  
heard when playing back a tape.  
c Set it to STEREO (p. 202).  
The volume is turned to minimum.  
c Turn up the volume (p. 40).  
AUDIO MIX is set to ST2 in the menu settings.  
c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 202).  
The cassette has no cassette memory.  
c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 81).  
CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON (p. 205).  
During displaying the recorded date,  
date search does not work.  
The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions  
(p. 82).  
The cassette has no cassette memory.  
c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 80).  
CM SEARCH is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON (p. 205).  
The title search does not work.  
There is no title in the tape.  
c Superimpose the titles (p. 110).  
The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions  
(p. 80).  
AUDIO MIX is set to the ST1 side in the menu settings.  
c Adjust AUDIO MIX (p. 109).  
The new sound added to the  
recorded tape is not heard.  
TITLE DSPL is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
The title is not displayed.  
c Set it to ON (p. 205).  
212  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
In t h e re co rd in g a n d p la yb a ck  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The battery pack is not installed, or is dead or nearly dead.  
c Install a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).  
The power does not turn on.  
The AC power adaptor is not connected to a wall outlet.  
c Connect the AC power adaptor to a wall outlet (p. 19).  
The cassette was ejected after recording when using a  
cassette without cassette memory (p. 38).  
The end search does not work.  
You have not recorded on the new cassette yet (p. 39).  
The tape has a blank portion at the beginning or midway  
(p. 38).  
The end search does not work  
correctly.  
The operating temperature is too low.  
The battery pack is not fully charged.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again (p. 16).  
The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be  
recharged.  
The battery pack is quickly  
discharged.  
c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 15).  
You have used the battery pack in an extremely hot or  
cold environment for a long time.  
The battery remaining time indicator  
does not indicate the correct time.  
The battery pack is completely dead, and cannot be  
recharged.  
c Replace with a new battery pack (p. 15).  
The battery is not fully charged.  
c Install a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).  
A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication  
on the battery remaining indicator is correct (p. 16).  
A deviation has occurred in the remaining battery time.  
c Charge the battery pack fully again so that the indication  
on the battery remaining battery time indicator is correct  
(p. 16).  
The power goes off although the  
battery remaining time indicator  
indicates that the battery pack has  
enough power to operate.  
The power supply is disconnected.  
c Connect it firmly (p. 15, 19).  
The battery is dead.  
The cassette cannot be removed from  
the holder.  
c Use a charged battery pack (p. 15, 16).  
Moisture condensation has occurred.  
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at  
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 228).  
The % and Z indicators flash and no  
functions except for cassette ejection  
work.  
The gold-plated connector of the cassette is dirty or dusty.  
c Clean the gold-plated connector (p. 222).  
indicator does not appear when  
using a cassette with cassette  
memory.  
The q REMAIN is set to AUTO in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON to always display the remaining tape  
indicator (p. 206).  
Remaining tape indicator is not  
displayed.  
(continued on the following page)  
213  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Wh e n o p e ra t in g u sin g t h e Me m o ry St ick”  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The POWER switch is not set to MEMORY/ NETWORK  
(DCR-TRV50 only).  
The Memory Stickdoes not  
function.  
c Set it to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-TRV50 only)  
(p. 126).  
The Memory Stickis not inserted.  
c Insert a Memory Stick(p. 119).  
The Memory Stickhas already been full.  
c Delete unnecessary images and record again (p. 168).  
The Memory Stickformatted incorrectly is inserted.  
c Format the Memory Stickor use another Memory  
Stick(p. 119, 204).  
Recording does not function.  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 117).  
The image is protected.  
The image cannot be deleted.  
c Cancel image protection (p. 167).  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 117).  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
You cannot format the Memory  
Stick.  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 117).  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
Deleting all the images cannot be  
carried out.  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 117).  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 117).  
You cannot protect the image.  
INDEX screen is not displayed.  
c Press INDEX to display the INDEX screen and protect  
the image (p. 167).  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 117).  
You cannot write a print mark on  
the still image.  
INDEX screen is not displayed.  
c The print marks cannot be written to the single screen  
(p. 171).  
The Memory Stickis full.  
c Delete unnecessary print marks and write a print mark  
again (p. 168).  
You are trying to write a print mark on a moving picture.  
c Print marks cannot be written on a moving picture.  
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
The photo save does not work.  
LOCK.  
c Release the lock (p. 117).  
You may not be able to play back images in actual size  
when you try to play back images recorded by other  
equipment. This is not a malfunction.  
You cannot play back images in  
actual size.  
Your camcorder cannot play back some images processed  
with a computer (The file name will blink).  
You cannot play back image data.  
If you record images with any other equipment, the  
images may not play back normally on your camcorder.  
214  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Ot h e rs  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The title is not recorded.  
The cassette has no cassette memory.  
c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 110).  
The cassette memory is full.  
c Erase unwanted titles (p. 112).  
The cassette is set to prevent accidental erasure.  
c Slide the write-protect tab so that red portion is not  
visible (p. 23).  
The tape has a blank portion between recorded portions.  
c Superimpose the title to recorded positions (p. 110).  
The cassette label is not recorded.  
The cassette has no cassette memory.  
c Use a cassette with cassette memory (p. 115).  
The cassette memory is full.  
c Erase unwanted data (p. 112).  
The cassette is set to prevent accidental erasure.  
c Slide the write-protect tab so that red mark is not visible  
(p. 23).  
Digital program editing to a tape  
does not function.  
The input selector on the VCR is not set correctly.  
c Check the connection and set the input selector on the  
VCR again (p. 89)  
The camcorder is connected to DV equipment of other  
than Sony using the i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable).  
c Set it to IR (p. 94).  
You have attempted to set a program on a blank portion of  
the tape.  
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 97).  
The camcorder and the VCR are not synchronized.  
c Adjust the synchronization (p. 95).  
The IR SETUP code is incorrect.  
c Set the correct code (p. 91).  
Digital program editing to a  
Memory Stickdoes not function.  
Setting program on a blank portion of the tape is  
attempted.  
c Set the program again on a recorded portion (p. 151).  
The Remote Commander supplied  
with your camcorder does not work.  
COMMANDER is set to OFF in the menu settings.  
c Set it to ON (p. 208).  
Something is blocking the infrared rays.  
c Remove the obstacle.  
The batteries are inserted with + and incorrectly  
matching + and inside the battery compartment.  
c Insert the batteries correctly (p. 243).  
The batteries are dead.  
c Insert new ones (p. 243).  
The picture from a TV or VCR does  
not appear even when your  
camcorder is connected to output on  
the TV or VCR.  
DISPLAY is set to V-OUT/ LCD in the menu settings.  
c Set it to LCD (p. 209).  
(continued on the following page)  
215  
Typ e s o f t ro u b le a n d h o w t o co rre ct t ro u b le  
Symptom  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
The melody or beep sounds for  
five seconds.  
Moisture condensation has occurred.  
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at  
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 228).  
Some troubles have occurred in your camcorder.  
c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate  
your camcorder.  
You cannot charge the battery pack.  
The POWER switch is not set to OFF (CHG).  
c Set it to OFF (CHG) (p. 16).  
While charging the battery pack, no  
indicator appears, the indicator  
flashes in the display window.  
The battery pack is not properly installed.  
c Install it properly (p. 15).  
Something is wrong with the battery pack.  
c Please contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony  
service facility.  
No function works though the  
power is on.  
Disconnect the power cord of the AC power adaptor or  
remove the battery, then reconnect it in about one minute.  
Turn the power on. If the functions still do not work, press  
the RESET button using a sharp-pointed object (If you  
press the RESET button, all the settings including the date  
and time return to their defaults.) (p. 15, 19, 240).  
When you set the POWER switch to  
VCR or OFF (CHG), if you move  
your camcorder, you may hear a  
clattering sound from inside your  
camcorder.  
This is because some functions use a linear mechanism.  
Your camcorder is not malfunctioning.  
The buttons do not appear on the  
touch panel.  
The DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL button is pressed.  
c Press the LCD screen lightly.  
c Press the DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL button on your  
camcorder or the DISPLAY button on the Remote  
Commander (p. 42).  
The buttons on the LCD screen do  
not work.  
Adjust the screen (CALIBRATION) (p. 230).  
The mirror mode is activated.  
This is not a malfunction.  
The indicators appear mirror-  
reversed in the viewfinder or on the  
TV screen.  
The USB cable was connected before installation of the  
USB driver was completed.  
Image data cannot be transferred by  
the USB connection.  
c Uninstall the incorrect USB driver and re-install the USB  
driver (p. 179, 182).  
USBCONNECT is set to PTP in the menu settings when  
the POWER switch is set to MEMORY/ NETWORK (DCR-  
TRV50 only).  
c Set it to NORMAL (p. 207).  
Moisture has started to condense in your camcorder  
(p. 228).  
The cassette cannot be removed  
even if the cassette lid is open.  
216  
Se lf-d ia g n o sis d isp la y  
Your camcorder has a self-diagnosis display  
function.  
LCD scre e n , vie w fin d e r o r  
d isp la y w in d o w  
This function displays the current state of your  
camcorder as a 5-digit code (a combination of a  
letter and figures) on the screen. If a 5-digit code is  
displayed, check the following list of codes. The  
last two digits (indicated by ss) differ depending  
on the state of your camcorder.  
C:21:00  
Self-diagnosis display  
C:ss:ss  
You can service your camcorder  
yourself.  
E:ss:ss  
Contact your Sony dealer or local  
authorized Sony service facility.  
Five-digit display  
Cause and/or Corrective Actions  
You are using a battery pack that is not an  
C:04:ss  
InfoLITHIUMbattery pack.  
c Use an InfoLITHIUMbattery pack (p. 18, 223).  
C:21:ss  
Moisture condensation has occurred.  
c Remove the cassette and leave your camcorder for at  
least one hour to acclimatize (p. 228).  
C:22:ss  
The video heads are dirty.  
c Clean the heads using the cleaning cassette (optional)  
(p. 229).  
C:31:ss  
C:32:ss  
A malfunction other than the above that you can service  
has occurred.  
c Remove the cassette and insert it again, then operate  
your camcorder.  
c Disconnect the power cord of the AC power adaptor or  
remove the battery pack. After reconnecting the power  
supply, operate your camcorder.  
E:20:ss  
E:61:ss  
E:62:ss  
E:91:ss  
A malfunction that you cannot service has occurred.  
c Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony  
service facility and inform them of the 5-digit code  
(example: E:61:10).  
If you are unable to rectify the problem even if you try corrective actions a few times,  
contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.  
217  
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s  
If indicators and messages appear on the screen or in the display window, check the  
following:  
See the page in parentheses ( )for more information.  
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs  
1000001  
C:21:00  
100-0001 Warning indicator as to file  
Warning indicator as to Memory Stick”  
Slow flashing:  
formatting*  
The file is corrupted.  
Fast flashing:  
The file is unreadable.  
• “Memory Stickis not formatted correctly  
You are trying to use the MEMORY MIX on a  
(p. 204).  
moving picture (p. 139).  
The Memory Stickdata is corrupted  
(p. 117).  
C:21:00 Self-diagnosis display (p. 217).  
Q Warning indicator as to tape  
Slow flashing:  
The tape is near the end.  
No cassette is inserted.*  
The write-protect tab on the cassette is  
exposed (red) (p. 23).*  
E The battery is dead or nearly dead  
Slow flashing:  
The battery is nearly dead.  
Depending on the operating conditions,  
environment and battery condition, the E  
indicator may flash even if there are  
approximately five to 10 minutes remaining.  
Fast flashing:  
The cassette has run out of tape.*  
Fast flashing:  
The battery is dead (p. 16).  
Z You need to eject the cassette*  
Slow flashing:  
The write-protect tab on the cassette is  
% Moisture condensation has occurred*  
Fast flashing:  
Eject the cassette, turn off your camcorder,  
and leave it for about one hour with the  
cassette compartment open (p. 228).  
exposed (red) (p. 23).  
Fast flashing:  
Moisture condensation has occurred (p. 228).  
The cassette has run out of tape.  
The self-diagnosis display function is  
activated (p. 217).  
Warning indicator as to cassette  
memory*  
Slow flashing:  
No cassette with cassette memory is inserted  
(p. 220).  
- The image is protected*  
Slow flashing:  
The image is protected (p. 167).  
Warning indicator as to Memory Stick”  
Slow flashing:  
No Memory Stickis inserted.  
Warning indicator as to the flash  
Slow flashing:  
During charging  
Fast flashing*:  
The Memory Stickis not readable on your  
camcorder (p. 117).  
The image cannot be recorded on Memory  
Stick.  
Fast flashing:  
The self-diagnosis display function is  
activated (p. 217).*  
There is something wrong with the built-in  
flash or the external flash (optional).  
Warning indicator as to recording of  
still image  
Slow image:  
The still image cannot be recorded on a tape  
or a Memory Stick(p. 47, 52).  
* You hear the melody or beep.  
218  
Wa rn in g in d ica t o rs a n d m e ssa g e s  
Wa rn in g m e ssa g e s  
CLOCK SET  
Set the date and time (p. 20).  
Use an InfoLITHIUMbattery pack (p. 18).  
FOR InfoLITHIUM”  
BATTERY ONLY  
CLEANING CASSETTE** The video heads are dirty (p. 229).  
FULL  
16BIT  
The cassette memory is full.*  
AUDIO MODE is set to 16BIT (p. 206).* You cannot  
dub new audio.  
REC MODE  
TAPE  
REC MODE is set to LP (p. 206).* You cannot dub  
new audio.  
There is no recorded portion on the tape.* You cannot  
dub new audio.  
i.LINKCABLE  
The i.LINK cable is connected (p. 109).* You cannot  
dub new audio.  
FULL  
The Memory Stickis full (p. 129).*  
-
The write-protect tab on the Memory Stickis set to  
LOCK (p. 117).*  
NO FILE  
No still image is recorded on the Memory Stick”  
(p. 157).*  
NO MEMORY STICK  
AUDIO ERROR  
No Memory Stickis inserted.*  
You are trying to record an image with sound that  
cannot be recorded by your camcorder on Memory  
Stick(p. 148).*  
MEMORY STICK ERROR  
FORMAT ERROR  
The Memory Stickdata is corrupted (p. 119).*  
The Memory Stickis not recognized. Check the  
format (p. 204).*  
- DIRECTORY ERROR  
PLAY ERROR  
There are more than two of the same directories  
(p. 157).*  
The image cannot be played back. Reinsert the  
Memory Stick,then play back the image again.  
REC ERROR  
Check the input signal before retrying recording  
(p. 138, 150).*  
COPY INHIBIT  
The tape contains copyright control signals for  
copyright protection of software (p. 221).*  
Q Z TAPE END  
The tape has reached its end.*  
Insert a cassette.*  
Q NO TAPE  
NO PRINT MARK  
You selected MARKED in 9PIC PRINT on the touch  
panel using a Memory Stickcontaining no image  
with a print mark. (p. 173)*  
NO STILL IMAGE FILE  
You selected MULTI in 9PIC PRINT on the touch  
panel using a Memory Stickcontaining no still  
image. (p. 173)*  
DELETING  
You have pressed PHOTO during deleting all images  
on Memory Stick.*  
FORMATTING  
You have pressed PHOTO during formatting a  
Memory Stick.*  
NOW CHARGING  
Charging an external flash (optional) does not work  
correctly.*  
* You hear the melody or beep.  
**The x indicator and “  
another on the screen.  
CLEANING CASSETTEmessage appear one after  
219  
Ad d it io n a l In fo rm a t io n —  
Usa b le ca sse t t e s  
Se le ct in g ca sse t t e t yp e s  
You can use  
Digital8,  
mini DV cassettes only*. You cannot use any other 8 mm,  
Hi8,  
VHS,  
VHSC,  
S-VHS,  
S-VHSC, Betamax,  
ED Betamax,  
DV or  
MICRO MV cassette.  
* There are two types of mini DV cassettes: with cassette memory and without cassette  
memory. Cassettes with cassette memory have the (Cassette Memory) mark.  
We recommend that you use cassette with cassette memory.  
IC memory is mounted on this type of cassette. Your camcorder can read and write  
data such as dates of recording or titles, etc. to this memory.  
The functions using the cassette memory require successive signals recorded on the  
tape. If the tape has a blank portion at the beginning or between recorded portions,  
titles may not be displayed properly or the search functions may not work properly.  
Perform the following to prevent a blank portion from being made on the tape.  
Press END SEARCH to go to the end of the recorded portion before you begin the  
next recording if you operate the following:  
You have ejected the cassette while recording.  
You have played back the tape.  
You have used the edit search.  
If there is a blank portion or discontinuous signal on your tape, re-record from the  
beginning to the end of the tape as described above.  
The same result may occur when you record using a digital video camera recorder  
without a cassette memory on a tape recorded by one with the cassette memory.  
mark on the cassette  
The memory capacity of cassettes marked with  
is 4Kbit. Your camcorder can  
accommodate tapes having a memory capacity of up to 16Kbit. 16Kbit cassettes are  
marked with  
.
This is the mini DV mark.  
This is the Cassette Memory mark.  
These are trademarks.  
220  
Usa b le ca sse t t e s  
Co p yrig h t sig n a l  
Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck  
Using any other video camera recorder, you cannot record on tape that has recorded  
copyright control signals for copyright protection of software which is played back on  
your camcorder.  
Wh e n yo u re co rd  
You cannot record software on your camcorder that contains copyright control signals  
for copyright protection of software.  
COPY INHIBITappears on the screen or on the TV screen if you try to record such  
software.  
Your camcorder does not record copyright control signals on the tape when it records.  
Au d io m o d e  
12-bit mode: The original sound can be recorded in stereo 1, and the new sound in  
stereo 2 in 32 kHz. The balance between stereo 1 and stereo 2 can be  
adjusted by selecting AUDIO MIX in the menu settings during playback.  
Both sounds can be played back.  
16-bit mode: New audio cannot be recorded but the original sound can be recorded in  
high quality. Moreover, your camcorder can also play back sound  
recorded in 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. When playing back a tape  
recorded in the 16-bit mode, the 16BIT indicator appears on screen.  
Wh e n yo u p la y b a ck a d u a l so u n d t ra ck t a p e  
When you play back a dual sound track tape recorded in a stereo system, set HiFi  
SOUND to the desired mode in the menu settings (p. 202).  
Sound from speaker  
HiFi SOUND  
mode  
Playing back  
a stereo tape  
Playing back a dual  
sound track tape  
Main sound and  
sub sound  
STEREO  
Stereo  
1
2
Left sound  
Main sound  
Sub sound  
Right sound  
You cannot record dual sound programs on your camcorder.  
221  
Usa b le ca sse t t e s  
No t e s o n t h e ca sse t t e  
Wh e n a ffixin g a la b e l o n t h e ca sse t t e  
Be sure to affix a label only at the locations illustrated below [a ] to prevent malfunction  
of your camcorder.  
Aft e r u sin g t h e ca sse t t e  
Rewind the tape to the beginning, put the cassette in its case, and store it upright.  
Wh e n t h e ca sse t t e m e m o ry d o e s n o t w o rk  
Reinsert a cassette. The gold-plated connector of the cassette may be dirty or dusty.  
Cle a n in g t h e g o ld -p la t e d co n n e ct o r  
If the gold-plated connector on the cassette is dirty or dusty, the remaining tape  
indicator is sometimes not displayed correctly, and you may not be able to operate  
functions using cassette memory. Clean the gold-plated connector with a cotton-wool  
swab, about every 10 times that the cassette is ejected. [b ]  
Do not affix a label  
along this border.  
[b ]  
[a ]  
222  
Ab o u t t h e In fo LITHIUMb a t t e ry p a ck  
Wh a t is t h e In fo LITHIUMb a t t e ry p a ck?  
The InfoLITHIUMbattery pack is a lithium-ion battery pack that has functions for  
communicating information related to operating conditions between the battery pack  
and an optional AC adaptor/ charger.  
The InfoLITHIUMbattery pack calculates the power consumption according to the  
operating conditions of your camcorder, and displays the remaining battery time in  
minutes. With an AC adaptor/ charger (optional), the remaining battery time and  
charging time are displayed.  
Ch a rg in g t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Be sure to charge the battery pack before you start using your camcorder.  
We recommend charging the battery pack in an ambient temperature of between  
10°C to 30°C (50°F to 86°F) until FULL appears in the display window, indicating that  
the battery pack is fully charged. If you charge the battery outside of this temperature  
range, you may not be able to efficiently charge the battery pack.  
After charging is completed, either disconnect the cable from the DC IN jack on your  
camcorder or remove the battery pack.  
Effe ct ive u se o f t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
Battery pack performance decreases in low-temperature surroundings. So, the time  
that the battery pack can be used becomes shorter. We recommend the following to  
ensure longer battery pack use:  
Put the battery pack in a pocket to warm it up, and insert it in your camcorder  
immediately before you start taking shots.  
Use the large-capacity battery pack (NP-FM70/ QM71/ FM90/ FM91/ QM91,  
optional).  
Frequently using the LCD panel or frequently operating playback, fast forward or  
rewind wears out the battery pack faster. We recommend using the large-capacity  
battery pack (NP-FM70/ QM71/ FM90/ FM91/ QM91, optional).  
Be sure to turn off the power switch when not taking shots or playing back on your  
camcorder. The battery pack is also consumed when your camcorder is in the standby  
or playback pause.  
Have spare battery packs handy for two or three times the expected recording time,  
and make trial recordings before taking the actual recording.  
Do not expose the battery pack to water. The battery pack is not water-resistant.  
Re m a in in g b a t t e ry t im e in d ica t o r  
If the power goes off although the remaining battery time indicator indicates that the  
battery pack has enough power to operate, fully charge the battery pack again so that  
the indication on the remaining battery time indicator is correct. Note, however, that  
the correct battery indication sometimes will not be restored if it is used in high  
temperatures for a long time or left in a fully charged state, or the battery pack is  
frequently used. Regard the remaining battery time indication as the approximate  
recording time.  
The E mark indicating that there is little remaining battery time sometimes flashes  
depending on the operating conditions or ambient temperature and environment even  
if the remaining battery time is about five to 10 minutes.  
(Continued on the following page)  
223  
Ab o u t t h e In fo LITHIUMb a t t e ry p a ck  
Ho w t o st o re t h e b a t t e ry p a ck  
If the battery pack is not used for a long time, do the following procedure once per  
year to maintain proper function.  
1. Fully charge the battery.  
2. Discharge on your electronic equipment.  
3. Remove the battery from the equipment and store it in a dry, cool place.  
To use the battery pack up on your camcorder, leave your camcorder in the recording  
standby until the power goes off without a cassette inserted.  
Ba t t e ry life  
The battery life is limited. Battery capacity drops little by little as you use it more and  
more, and as time passes. When the available battery time is shortened considerably, a  
probable cause is that the battery pack has reached the end of its life. Buy a new  
battery pack.  
The battery life varies according to how it is stored and operating conditions and  
environment for each battery pack.  
224  
Ab o u t i.LINK  
The DV jack on this unit is an i.LINK-compliant DV input/ output jack. This section  
describes the i.LINK standard and its features.  
Wh a t is i.LINK?  
i.LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video, digital audio and other  
data in two directions between equipment having the i.LINK jack, and for controlling  
other equipment.  
i.LINK-compatible equipment can be connected by a single i.LINK cable. Possible  
applications are operations and data transactions with various digital AV equipment.  
When two or more i.LINK-compatible equipment are connected to this unit in a daisy  
chain, operations and data transactions are possible with not only the equipment that  
this unit is connected to but also with other devices via the directly connected  
equipment.  
Note, however, that the method of operation sometimes varies according to the  
characteristics and specifications of the equipment to be connected, and that operations  
and data transactions are sometimes not possible on some connected equipment.  
Note  
Normally, only one piece of equipment can be connected to this unit by the i.LINK  
cable (DV cable). When connecting this unit to i.LINK-compatible equipment having  
two or more i.LINK jacks (DV jacks), refer to the operating instructions of the  
equipment to be connected.  
Ab o u t t h e n a m e i.LINK”  
i.LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 data transport bus proposed by SONY,  
and is a trademark approved by many corporations.  
IEEE 1394 is an international standard standardized by the Institute of Electrical and  
Electronic Engineers.  
i.LINK b a u d ra t e  
i.LINKs maximum baud rate varies according to the equipment. Three maximum  
baud rates are defined:  
S100 (approx. 100Mbps*)  
S200 (approx. 200Mbps)  
S400 (approx. 400Mbps)  
The baud rate is listed under Specificationsin the operating instructions of each  
equipment. It is also indicated near the i.LINK jack on some equipment.  
The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it is not indicated such as this unit is  
S100.  
When units are connected to equipment having a different maximum baud rate, the  
baud rate sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate.  
*What is Mbps?  
Mbps stands for megabits per second, or the amount of data that can be sent or  
received in one second. For example, a baud rate of 100Mbps means that 100 megabits  
of data can be sent in one second.  
225  
Ab o u t i.LINK  
i.LINK fu n ct io n s o n t h is u n it  
For details on how to dub when this unit is connected to other video equipment having  
DV jacks, see page 88 and 102.  
This unit can also be connected to other i.LINK (DV) compatible equipment made by  
SONY (e.g. VAIO series personal computer) other than video equipment.  
Before connecting this unit to a personal computer, make sure that application software  
supported by this unit is already installed on the personal computer.  
For details on precautions when connecting this unit, also refer to the operating  
instructions of the equipment to be connected.  
Re q u ire d i.LINK ca b le  
Use the Sony i.LINK 4-pin-to-4-pin cable (during DV dubbing).  
i.LINK and are trademarks.  
226  
Usin g yo u r ca m co rd e r a b ro a d  
Usin g yo u r ca m co rd e r a b ro a d  
Countries and areas where you can use network functions are restricted. For details,  
refer to the separate Network Operating Instructions. (DCR-TRV50 only)  
You can use your camcorder in any country or area with the AC power adaptor  
supplied with your camcorder within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/ 60 Hz.  
Use a commercially available AC plug adaptor [a ], if necessary, depending on the  
design of the wall outlet [b ].  
AC-L10A/L10B/L10C  
[a ]  
[b ]  
Your camcorder is an NTSC system based camcorder. If you want to view the playback  
picture on a TV, it must be an NTSC system based TV with the AUDIO/ VIDEO input  
jack.  
The following shows TV color systems used overseas.  
NTSC system  
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador, Guyana,  
Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the U.S.A.,  
Venezuela, etc.  
PAL system  
Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany,  
Holland, Hong Kong, Hungary, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway,  
Poland, Portugal, Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand,  
United Kingdom etc.  
PAL-M system  
Brazil  
PAL-N system  
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay  
SECAM system  
Bulgaria, France, Guiana, Iran, Iraq, Monaco, Russia, Ukraine, etc.  
227  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d  
p re ca u t io n s  
Mo ist u re co n d e n sa t io n  
If your camcorder is brought directly from a cold place to a warm place, moisture may  
condense inside your camcorder, on the surface of the tape, or on the lens. In this state,  
the tape may stick to the head drum and be damaged or your camcorder may not  
operate correctly. If there is moisture inside your camcorder, the beep and the %  
indicator flashes. When the Z indicator flashes at the same time, the cassette is inserted  
in your camcorder. If moisture condenses on the lens, the indicator will not appear.  
If m o ist u re co n d e n sa t io n h a s o ccu rre d  
None of the functions except cassette ejection will work. Eject the cassette, turn off your  
camcorder, and leave it for about one hour with the cassette lid open. Your camcorder  
can be used again if the % indicator does not appear when the power is turned on  
again.  
If moisture starts to condense, your camcorder sometimes cannot detect condensation.  
If this happens, the cassette is sometimes not ejected for 10 seconds after the cassette lid  
is opened. This is not a malfunction. Do not close the cassette lid until the cassette is  
ejected.  
Note on moisture condensation  
Moisture may condense when you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm  
place (or vice versa) or when you use your camcorder in a hot place as follows:  
You bring your camcorder from a ski slope into a place warmed up by heating device.  
You bring your camcorder from an air-conditioned car or room into a hot place  
outside.  
You use your camcorder after a squall or a shower.  
You use your camcorder in a high temperature and humid place.  
How to prevent moisture condensation  
When you bring your camcorder from a cold place into a warm place, put your  
camcorder in a plastic bag and tightly seal it. Remove the bag when the air temperature  
inside the plastic bag has reached the surrounding temperature (after about one hour).  
228  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n  
Cle a n in g t h e vid e o h e a d s  
To ensure normal recording and clear pictures, clean the video heads. The video heads  
may be dirty when:  
Mosaic-pattern noise appears on the playback picture.  
Playback pictures do not move.  
Playback pictures do not appear.  
The x indicator and CLEANING CASSETTEmessage appear one after another,  
or the x indicator flashes on the screen during recording.  
If the above problem [a ], [b ] or [c] occurs, clean the video heads for 10 seconds with the  
Sony DVM-12CLD cleaning cassette (optional). Check the picture and if the above  
problem persists, repeat cleaning.  
[a ]  
[b ]  
[c]  
If the video heads get dirtier, the entire screen becomes blue [c].  
Cle a n in g t h e LCD scre e n  
If fingerprints or dust make the LCD screen dirty, we recommend using the Cleaning  
cloth (supplied) to clean the LCD screen. When you use the LCD Cleaning Kit  
(optional), do not apply the cleaning liquid directly to the LCD screen. Clean the LCD  
screen with cleaning paper moistened with the liquid.  
229  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Ad ju st in g t h e LCD scre e n (CALIBRATION)  
The buttons on the touch panel may not work correctly. If this happens, follow the  
procedure below.  
(1) Set the POWER switch to OFF (CHG).  
(2) Eject the cassette from your camcorder, then disconnect any connecting cable  
from your camcorder.  
(3) Set the POWER switch to VCR while pressing DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL on  
your camcorder, then keep pressing DISPLAY/ TOUCH PANEL for about five  
seconds.  
(4) Follow the procedure below using an object such as the corner of a Memory  
Sticksupplied with your camcorder.  
You can use the supplied stylus for this operation (DCR-TRV50 only).  
1 Touch  
2 Touch  
3 Touch  
at the upper left corner.  
at the lower right corner.  
in the middle of the screen.  
CALIBRATE  
CALIBRATE  
CALIBRATE  
PB  
INDEX  
FN  
Note  
If you do not press the right spot, always returns to the position at the upper left  
corner. In this case, start from step 4 again.  
230  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Ch a rg in g t h e b u ilt -in re ch a rg e a b le b a t t e ry  
Your camcorder has a built-in rechargeable battery so that the date, time and other  
settings are retained even when the POWER switch is turned off. The built-in  
rechargeable battery is always charged as long as you are using your camcorder. The  
battery, however, will become discharged gradually if you do not use your camcorder.  
It will be completely discharged in about four months if you do not use your  
camcorder at all. Even if the built-in rechargeable battery is not charged, it will not  
affect camcorder operation. To retain the date, time, and other information, charge the  
battery if the battery is discharged.  
Charging the built-in rechargeable battery:  
Connect your camcorder to house current using the AC power adaptor supplied with  
your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with the power switch turned off for more  
than 24 hours.  
Or, install a charged battery pack in your camcorder, and leave your camcorder with  
the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) for more than 24 hours.  
Pre ca u t io n s  
Ca m co rd e r o p e ra t io n  
Operate your camcorder on 7.2 V (battery pack) or 8.4 V (AC power adaptor).  
For DC or AC operation, use the accessories recommended in these operating  
instructions.  
If any solid object or liquid gets inside the casing, unplug your camcorder and have it  
checked by a Sony dealer before operating it any further.  
Avoid rough handling or mechanical shock. Be particularly careful of the lens.  
Keep the POWER switch set to OFF (CHG) when you are not using your camcorder.  
Do not wrap your camcorder with a towel, for example, and operate it. Doing so  
might cause heat to build up inside.  
Keep your camcorder away from strong magnetic fields or mechanical vibration.  
Do not press the LCD screen with sharp objects other than the stylus supplied. (DCR-  
TRV50 only)  
If your camcorder is used in a cold place, a residual image may appear on the LCD  
screen. This is not a malfunction.  
While using your camcorder, the back of the LCD screen may heat up. This is not a  
malfunction.  
On h a n d lin g t a p e s  
Do not insert anything into the small holes on the rear of the cassette. These holes are  
used to sense the type and thickness of the tape and if the recording tab is in or out.  
Do not open the cassette protect cover or touch the tape.  
Avoid touching or damaging the terminals. To remove dust, clean the terminals with  
a soft cloth.  
231  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Ca m co rd e r ca re  
Remove the cassette, and periodically turn on the power, operate the CAMERA and  
VCR sections and play back a tape for about three minutes when your camcorder is  
not to be used for a long time.  
Clean the lens with a soft brush to remove dust. If there are fingerprints on the lens,  
remove them with a soft cloth.  
Clean the camcorder body with a dry soft cloth, or a soft cloth lightly moistened with  
a mild detergent solution. Do not use any type of solvent which may damage the  
finish.  
Do not let sand get into your camcorder. When you use your camcorder on a sandy  
beach or in a dusty place, protect it from the sand or dust. Sand or dust may cause  
your camcorder to malfunction, and sometimes this malfunction cannot be repaired.  
AC p o w e r a d a p t o r  
Unplug the unit from the wall outlet when you are not using it for a long time. To  
disconnect the power cord, pull it out by the plug. Never pull the power cord itself.  
Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or  
damaged.  
Do not bend the power cord forcibly, or place a heavy object on it. This will damage  
the cord and may cause fire or electric shock.  
Prevent metallic objects from coming into contact with the metal parts of the  
connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged.  
Always keep metal contacts clean.  
Do not disassemble the unit.  
Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit.  
While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers  
and video equipment. AM receivers and video equipment disturb AM reception and  
video operation.  
The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.  
Do not place the unit in locations that are:  
Extremely hot or cold  
Dusty or dirty  
Very humid  
Vibrating  
Ab o u t ca re a n d st o ra g e o f t h e le n s  
Wipe the surface of the lens clean with a soft cloth in the following instances:  
When there are fingerprints on the lens surface  
In hot or humid locations  
When the lens is used in environments such as the seaside  
Store the lens in a well-ventilated location subject to little dirt or dust.  
To prevent mold from growing, periodically perform the above.  
We recommend turning on and operating the video camera recorder about once per  
month to keep the video camera recorder in an optimum state for a long time.  
232  
Ma in t e n a n ce in fo rm a t io n a n d p re ca u t io n s  
Ba t t e ry p a ck  
Use only the specified charger or video equipment with the charging function.  
To prevent accident from a short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into  
contact with the battery terminals.  
Keep the battery pack away from fire.  
Never expose the battery pack to temperatures above 60°C (140°F), such as in a car  
parked in the sun or under direct sunlight.  
Keep the battery pack dry.  
Do not expose the battery pack to any mechanical shock.  
Do not disassemble nor modify the battery pack.  
Attach the battery pack to the video equipment securely.  
Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity.  
No t e s o n d ry b a t t e rie s  
To avoid possible damage from battery leakage or corrosion, observe the following:  
Be sure to insert the batteries with the + and correctly matching the + and inside  
the battery compartment.  
Dry batteries are not rechargeable.  
Do not use a combination of new and old batteries.  
Do not use different types of batteries.  
Current flows from batteries when you are not using them for a long time.  
Do not use leaking batteries.  
If batteries are leaking  
Wipe off the liquid in the battery compartment carefully before replacing the batteries.  
If you touch the liquid, wash it off with water.  
If the liquid gets into your eyes, wash your eyes with a lot of water and then consult a  
doctor.  
If any problem occurs, unplug your camcorder and contact your nearest Sony dealer.  
233  
Sp e cifica t io n s  
Color temperature  
Wire le ss co m m u n ica t io n s  
Vid e o ca m e ra  
re co rd e r  
Auto, HOLD (Hold), nIndoor  
(3 200 K), Outdoor (5 800 K)  
Minimum illumination  
7 lx (lux) (F 1.8)  
0 lx (lux) (in the NightShot mode)*  
* Objects unable to be seen due to  
the dark can be shot with  
infrared lighting.  
(DCR-TRV50 only)  
Communications system  
Bluetooth standard Ver.1.1  
Max. baud rate1) 2)  
Approx. 723 kbps  
Output  
Bluetooth standard Power Class 2  
Communications distance2)  
Max. wireless distance Approx. 10  
m (393 3/ 4 in.) (When connecting  
to BTA-NW1)  
Compatible Bluetooth profile3)  
Generic Access Profile  
Dial-up Networking Profile  
Operating frequency band  
2.4 GHz band (2.400 GHz –  
2.483 5 GHz)  
Syst e m  
Video recording system  
2 rotary heads  
Helical scanning system  
Audio recording system  
Rotary heads, PCM system  
Quantization: 12 bits (Fs 32 kHz,  
stereo 1, stereo 2), 16 bits  
(Fs 48 kHz, stereo)  
Video signal  
NTSC color, EIA standards  
Usable cassette  
Mini DV cassette with the  
mark printed  
Tape speed  
SP: Approx. 18.81 mm/ s  
LP: Approx. 12.56 mm/ s  
Recording/playback time  
(using cassette DVM60)  
SP: 1 hour  
In p u t /Ou t p u t co n n e ct o rs  
S video input/output  
4-pin mini DIN  
Luminance signal: 1 Vp-p,  
75 (ohms), unbalanced  
Chrominance signal: 0.286 Vp-p,  
75 (ohms), unbalanced  
Audio/Video input/output  
AV MINI JACK, 1 Vp-p,  
75 (ohms), unbalanced, sync  
negative  
327 mV, (at output impedance  
more than 47 k(kilohms))  
Output impedance with less than  
2.2 k(kilohms)/ Stereo minijack  
(ø 3.5 mm)  
1)  
Max. baud rate of Bluetooth  
standard Ver.1.1  
Varies according to the distance  
between communicating  
devices, presence of obstacles,  
radiowave conditions, and other  
factors.  
2)  
LP: 1.5 hours  
Fastforw ard/rew ind time  
(using cassette DVM60)  
When using the battery pack:  
Approx. 2 min. and 30 seconds  
When using the AC power  
adaptor:  
3)  
Input impedance more than  
47 k(kilohms)  
DV input/output  
4-pin connector  
Headphone jack  
This is a specification matched  
to specific usage requirements  
between Bluetooth compatible  
devices. It is laid down in the  
Bluetooth standards.  
Approx. 1 min. and 45 seconds  
View finder  
Stereo minijack (ø 3.5 mm)  
LANC jack  
Electric viewfinder (color)  
Image device  
Stereo mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm)  
USB jack  
4.5 mm (1/ 4 type) CCD (Charge  
Coupled Device)  
mini-B  
MIC jack  
Gross: Approx. 1 550 000 pixels  
Effective (still):  
Approx. 1 390 000 pixels  
Effective (moving):  
Minijack, 0.388 mV low impedance  
with 2.5 to 3.0 V DC, output  
impedance 6.8 k(kilohms) (ø 3.5  
mm)  
Approx. 970 000 pixels  
Lens  
Stereo type  
Carl Zeiss Vario-Sonnar  
Combined power zoom lens  
Filter diameter: 37 mm  
(1 1/ 2 in)  
10× (Optical), 120× (Digital)  
F = 1.8 ~ 2.2  
LCD scre e n  
Picture  
8.8 cm (3.5 type)  
72.2 × 50.4 mm (2 4/ 5 × 2 in.)  
Total dot number  
246 400 (1 120 × 220)  
Focal length  
4.2 42 mm (3/ 16 1 11/ 16 in.)  
When converted to a 35 mm still  
camera  
In CAMERA:  
48 480 mm (1 15/ 16 19 in.)  
In MEMORY:  
40 400 mm (1 5/ 8 15 3/ 4 in.)  
234  
Sp e cifica t io n s  
Ge n e ra l  
Ba t t e ry p a ck  
Pow er requirements  
7.2 V (battery pack)  
8.4 V (AC power adaptor)  
Average pow er consumption  
(w hen using the battery pack)  
During camera recording using  
LCD  
4.5 W  
Viewfinder  
3.4 W  
Maximum output voltage  
DC 8.4 V  
Output voltage  
DC 7.2 V  
Capacity  
8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh)  
Dimensions (approx.)  
38.2 × 20.5 × 55.6 mm  
(1 9/ 16 × 13/ 16 × 2 1/ 4 in.)  
(w/ h/ d)  
Mass (approx.)  
76 g (2.7 oz)  
Type  
Operating temperature  
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Storage temperature  
20°C to + 60°C  
Lithium ion  
(4°F to + 140°F)  
Dimensions (Approx.)  
72 × 91 × 168 mm  
(2 7/ 8 × 3 5/ 8 × 6 5/ 8 in.) (w/ h/ d)  
Mass (Approx.)  
700 g (1 lb 8 oz)  
main unit only  
Me m o ry St ick”  
Memory  
Flash memory  
8MB: MSA-8A  
Operating voltage  
2.7 3.6 V  
Pow er consumption  
Approx. 45 mA in the operating  
mode  
Approx. 130 µA in the standby  
mode  
800 g (1 lb 12 oz)  
including the battery pack  
NP-FM50, cassette DVM60 and  
lens cap  
Supplied accessories  
See page 14.  
Dimensions (approx.)  
50 × 2.8 × 21.5 mm  
(2 × 1/ 8 × 7/ 8 in.) (w/ h/ d)  
Mass (approx.)  
4 g (0.14 oz)  
AC p o w e r a d a p t o r  
Pow er requirements  
100 240 V AC, 50/ 60 Hz  
Pow er consumption  
23 W  
Design and specifications are  
Output voltage  
subject to change without notice.  
DC OUT: 8.4 V, 1.5 A in the  
operating mode  
Operating temperature  
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Storage temperature  
20°C to + 60°C  
(4°F to + 140°F)  
Dimensions (approx.)  
125 × 39 × 62 mm  
(5 × 1 9/ 16 × 2 1/ 2 in.) (w/ h/ d)  
excluding projecting parts  
Mass (approx.)  
280 g (9.8 oz)  
excluding power cord  
235  
Qu ick Re fe re n ce —  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
Ca m co rd e r  
8
9
q;  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1Flash (p. 49, 130)  
6Microphone  
2Focus ring (p. 69)  
7Remote sensor  
3Lens  
8View finder (p. 30)  
9Display w indow (p. 16)  
0HOLOGRAM AF emitter (p. 132)  
4Camera recording lamp (p. 26)  
5Infrared rays emitter (p. 34, 92)  
Note on the Carl Zeiss lens  
Your camcorder is equipped with a Carl Zeiss lens which can reproduce fine images.  
The lens for your camcorder was developed jointly by Carl Zeiss, in Germany, and  
Sony Corporation. It adopts the MTF# measurement system for video camera and  
offers a quality as the Carl Zeiss lens.  
#
MTF Stands for Modulation Transfer Function.  
The value number indicates the amount of light of a subject coming into the lens.  
236  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
qj  
qk  
ql  
qa  
w;  
qs  
wa  
qd  
qf  
qg  
qh  
qaPHOTO button (p. 47, 52, 126)  
qsLOCK sw itch (p. 26)  
qdDC IN jack cover  
qjEDITSEARCH button (p. 38)  
qkNIGHTSHOT sw itch (p. 34)  
ql  
(Bluetooth) lamp (DCR-TRV50 only)  
(p. 197)  
qfDC IN jack (p. 19)  
w;SUPER NS/COLOR SLOW S button  
qgSTART/STOP button (p. 26)  
qhPOWER sw itch (p. 26)  
(p. 34)  
waStylus (DCR-TRV50 only) (p. 198)  
237  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
wh  
wj  
ws  
wd  
wk  
wl  
wf  
e;  
ea  
es  
ed  
ef  
wg  
wsPow er zoom lever (p. 31, 77, 164)  
wdBATT release button (p. 15)  
wfHooks for shoulder strap  
wgMemory Stickslot (p. 119)  
wh (USB) jack (p. 174)  
eaMIC jack (PLUG IN POWER) (red)  
Connect an external microphone  
(optional). This jack also accepts a  
plug-in-powermicrophone.  
esS VIDEO ID-2 jack (p. 46, 86, 137, 149)  
edi (headphones) jack (green)  
When you use headphones, the speaker  
on your camcorder is silent.  
wj  
wk DV IN/OUT jack (p. 88, 102, 138, 150)  
wl (LANC) jack (blue)  
e;Jack cover (p. 46)  
(flash) button (p. 49, 130)  
efAUDIO/VIDEO jack (yellow ) (p. 46, 86,  
137, 149)  
238  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
eg  
eh  
ek  
el  
r;  
ra  
ej  
REW  
REC  
PLAY  
STOP  
FF  
PAUSE  
egIntelligent accessory shoe (p. 106)  
ehLCD/Touch panel screen (p. 24, 29, 120)  
ejSpeaker  
raVideo control buttons  
x STOP (stop)  
m REW (rewind)  
N PLAY (playback)  
M FF (fastforward)  
X PAUSE (pause)  
z REC (record)  
ekVOLUME buttons (p. 40)  
elDISPLAY/TOUCH PANEL button (p. 42)  
r;MENU button (p. 199)  
Notes on the intelligent accessory shoe  
The intelligent accessory shoe supplies power to optional accessories such as a video  
light or microphone.  
The intelligent accessory shoe is linked to the POWER switch, allowing you to turn the  
power supplied by the shoe on and off. Refer to the operating instructions of the  
accessory for further information.  
The intelligent accessory shoe has a safety device for fixing the installed accessory  
securely. To connect an accessory, press down and push it to the end, and then tighten  
the screw.  
To remove an accessory, loosen the screw, and then press down and pull out the  
accessory.  
239  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
rj  
rk  
rs  
rd  
rf  
rg  
rh  
rl  
t;  
ta  
rsOPEN button (p. 26)  
rdFOCUS sw itch (p. 69)  
rfRESET button (p. 216)  
rgFADER button (p. 58)  
rhBACK LIGHT button (p. 34)  
rjView finder lens adjustment lever  
(p. 30)  
rkNETWORK button (DCR-TRV50 only)  
(p. 197)  
rlSEL/PUSH EXEC dial (p. 199)  
t;PROGRAM AE button  
taEXPOSURE button (p. 67)  
240  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
th  
tj  
ts  
td  
tk  
tl  
y;  
tf  
tg  
tsAccess lamp  
tkLens cap (p. 26)  
tlCassette lid (p. 23)  
y;Tripod receptacle  
tdBattery pack (p. 15)  
tf  
OPEN/EJECT lever (p. 23)  
Make sure that the length of the tripod  
screw is less than 5.5 mm (7/ 32 inch).  
Otherwise, you cannot attach the tripod  
securely, and the screw may damage  
your camcorder.  
tgCassette compartment  
thGrip strap  
tjHolder (DCR-TRV50 only) (p. 198)  
Fastening the grip strap  
Fasten the grip strap firmly.  
2
3
1
4
241  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
The buttons that have the same name on the Remote Commander as on your camcorder  
function identically to the buttons on your camcorder.  
8
1
9
0
qa  
qs  
2
3
4
5
qd  
6
7
qf  
1PHOTO button (p. 47, 52, 126)  
2DISPLAY button (p. 42)  
3Memory control buttons  
4SEARCH MODE button (p. 80, 81, 83)  
5Video control buttons (p. 44)  
6REC button  
8Transmitter  
Point toward the remote sensor to  
control your camcorder after turning on  
your camcorder.  
9ZERO SET MEMORY button (p. 79)  
q;START/STOP button (p. 26)  
qaDATA CODE button (p. 42)  
qsPow er zoom button (p. 31)  
qd./> buttons (p. 80, 81, 83)  
qfAUDIO DUB button (p. 108)  
7MARK button (p. 97)  
242  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
To p re p a re t h e Re m o t e Co m m a n d e r  
Insert two size AA (R6) batteries by matching the + and on the batteries to  
the + and in the battery compartment.  
Notes on the Remote Commander  
Point the remote sensor away from strong light sources such as direct sunlight or  
overhead lighting. Otherwise, the Remote Commander may not function properly.  
Your camcorder works in the commander mode VTR 2. Commander modes 1, 2 and 3  
are used to distinguish your camcorder from other Sony VCRs to avoid erroneous  
remote control operation. If you use another Sony VCR in the commander mode VTR  
2, we recommend changing the commander mode or covering the sensor of the VCR  
with black paper.  
243  
Id e n t ifyin g p a rt s a n d co n t ro ls  
Op e ra t io n in d ica t o rs  
LCD scre e n a n d Vie w fin d e r  
Disp la y w in d o w  
qd  
qf  
qg  
qh  
qj  
qk  
ql  
w;  
1
2
3
4
5
wl  
:
:
120min  
STILL  
STBY  
0 12 34  
12min  
+
6
ZERO SET  
MEMORY  
END  
wa  
ws  
:
16 9WIDE  
NEG. ART  
wk  
B
SEARCH  
AUTO  
60 AWB  
F1.8 9db  
DV IN  
16BIT  
1000001  
wd  
wf  
7
8
9
0
qa  
qs  
wg  
wh  
wj  
1Cassette memory (p. 33, 220)  
qkWarning (p. 218)  
2Remaining battery time (p. 33)  
qlTape counter (p. 33)/Time code  
(p. 33)/Self-diagnosis (p. 217)/Tape  
photo (p. 52)/Memory photo (p. 126)/  
Image number (p. 157)  
3Zoom (p. 31)/Exposure (p. 67)/  
Data file name (p. 117)  
4Digital effect (p. 61, 76)/MEMORY MIX  
w;Remaining tape (p. 33)/Memory  
(p. 139)/FADER (p. 57)  
playback (p. 157)  
516:9WIDE (p. 55)  
waZERO SET MEMORY (p. 79)  
wsEND SEARCH (p. 38)  
6Picture effect (p. 60, 75)  
7Data code (p. 42)  
wdA/V t DV (p. 196)/DV IN (p. 103)  
wfAudio mode (p. 206)  
8Volume (p. 40)/Date (p. 33)  
9PROGRAM AE (p. 64)  
0Backlight (p. 34)  
wgData file name (p. 117)/Time (p. 33)  
whFlash (p. 49, 130)  
qaSteadyShot off (p. 201)  
qsManual focus/Infinity (p. 69)  
qdSelf-timer (p. 37, 51, 134)  
qfRecording mode (p. 33)  
qgHOLOGRAM AF (p. 132)  
This indicator appears only when the  
flash is in use.  
wjContinuous photo recording (p. 128)  
wkRemaining battery time indicator (p.  
33)/Tape counter (p. 33)/Memory  
counter (p. 33)/Time code indicator (p.  
33)/Self-diagnosis indicator (p. 217)  
qhSTBY/REC (p. 33)/Video control mode  
(p. 44)/Image size (p. 124)/Image  
quality (p. 122)  
wlFULL charge indicator (p. 16)  
qjNIGHTSHOT (p. 34)/SUPER NIGHTSHOT  
(p. 35) COLOR SLOW SHUTTER (p. 35)  
244  
In d e x  
HOLOGRAM AF .................. 132  
A, B  
R
AC power adaptor .................. 16  
Adjusting viewfinder ............. 30  
Audio dubbing ...................... 106  
AUDIO MIX .......................... 202  
Audio mode ........................... 206  
Auto red-eye reduction  
........................................ 49, 130  
AUTO SHTR .......................... 200  
A/ V connecting cable  
.......... 46, 86, 100, 137, 149, 196  
BACK LIGHT .......................... 34  
Battery pack ............................. 15  
BEEP ....................................... 208  
BOUNCE .................................. 57  
Recording time ........................ 17  
Rec Review .............................. 39  
Remaining battery time  
indicator ................................ 33  
Remaining tape indicator ...... 33  
Remote Commander ............ 242  
Remote sensor ....................... 236  
RESET ..................................... 216  
I, J, K, L  
i.LINK ..................................... 225  
Image protection ................... 167  
Image quality ........................ 122  
Image size .............................. 124  
Index screen ........................... 158  
InfoLITHIUMbattery ...... 223  
Infrared rays emitter ......... 34, 92  
Insert editing ......................... 104  
Intelligent accessory shoe .... 239  
Interval recording ................... 72  
JPEG ........................................ 117  
Labeling a cassette ................ 115  
LANC jack ............................. 238  
LUMINANCE KEY ................ 61  
S
Self-diagnosis display .......... 217  
Self-timer recording  
.................................. 37, 51, 134  
Signal convert function ........ 196  
Skip scan .................................. 44  
Slide show .............................. 166  
Slow playback ......................... 44  
SLOW SHUTTER .................... 61  
SPOT FOCUS .......................... 71  
STEADYSHOT ...................... 201  
Stereo tape ............................. 221  
STILL ........................................ 61  
Sub sound .............................. 221  
Super NightShot ..................... 35  
S VIDEO jack  
C, D  
CALIBRATION ..................... 230  
Camera chroma key ............. 139  
Cassette memory ............ 12, 220  
Charging battery ..................... 16  
Charging built-in rechargeable  
battery ................................. 231  
Clock set ................................... 20  
Color Slow Shutter ................. 35  
Continuous photo recording  
.............................................. 128  
Data code ................................. 42  
Date search .............................. 81  
DEMO ..................................... 207  
Digital effect ...................... 61, 76  
Digital program editing  
M, N  
Main sound ............................ 221  
Manual focus ........................... 69  
Memory chroma key ............ 139  
Memory luminance key ....... 139  
MEMORY MIX ...................... 139  
Memory PB ZOOM .............. 164  
Memory photo recording .... 126  
Memory Stick.................... 117  
Memory Stickrecording  
capacity ............................... 125  
Menu settings ........................ 199  
Memory overlap ................... 139  
M. FADER ................................ 57  
Mirror mode ............................ 32  
Moisture condensation ........ 228  
MONOTONE .......................... 57  
MPEG ..................................... 117  
MPEG movie recording ....... 144  
MULTI SCRN ........................ 128  
NETWORK ............................ 197  
Nightshot ................................. 34  
NTSC system ......................... 227  
.................. 46, 86, 100, 137, 149  
T, U, V  
Tape counter ............................ 33  
Tape PB ZOOM ....................... 77  
Tape photo recording ............. 52  
Telephoto ................................. 31  
Time code ................................. 33  
Title ................................. 110, 113  
Title search ............................... 80  
TRAIL ....................................... 61  
Transition ................................. 27  
TV color systems ................... 227  
USB jack ................................. 180  
USB streaming ....................... 177  
........................................ 89, 151  
DISPLAY .................................. 42  
DOT .......................................... 57  
Dual sound track tape .......... 221  
DV connecting cable  
................................ 88, 138, 196  
E
EDITSEARCH ......................... 38  
END SEARCH ................... 38, 44  
EXP BRKTG ........................... 128  
Exposure .................................. 67  
O, P, Q  
W, X, Y, Z  
OLD MOVIE ............................ 61  
Operation indicators ............ 244  
OVERLAP ................................ 57  
Photo save .............................. 154  
Photo scan ................................ 85  
Photo search ............................ 83  
Picture effect ...................... 60, 75  
Picture search .......................... 44  
Playback pause ........................ 44  
Playing time ............................. 18  
Power zoom ............................. 31  
Print mark .............................. 171  
PROGRAM AE....................... 64  
Warning indicators ............... 218  
White balance .......................... 54  
Wide-angle .............................. 31  
Wide mode .............................. 55  
WIPE ......................................... 57  
Write-protect tab ............. 23, 117  
Zero set memory ..................... 79  
Zoom ........................................ 31  
F, G, H  
FADER ..................................... 57  
Fade in/ out .............................. 57  
Flash .................................. 49, 130  
FLASH MOTION .................... 61  
Flexible Spot Meter ................. 68  
FOCUS ...................................... 69  
Format ............................ 117, 204  
Frame recording ...................... 74  
Full charge ............................... 16  
Grip strap ............................... 241  
i (Headphone) jack ............. 238  
Heads ...................................... 229  
HiFi SOUND ......................... 202  
HIGH SPEED ........................ 128  
245  
Printed on recycled paper.  
Printed using VOC (Volatile Organic  
Compound)-free vegetable oil based ink.  
Sony Corporation Printed in Japan  

Texas Instruments Audio Power Amplifier Evaluation Module TAP6203A1 User Manual
Sterling Plumbing SDRIOM 2 User Manual
Sony XR150E User Manual
Sony Walkman WM FX193 User Manual
Sony Handycam HDRCX150E User Manual
Sony CDX R450 User Manual
Sony Cassette Player XR CA600V User Manual
Sony CARL ZEISS WIDE ZOOM LENS SAL1635Z User Manual
Samsung ST50 User Manual
Salton HB 1094 User Manual